x86: Support Intel IBT with IBT property and IBT-enable PLT
[binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set H8300
25 @set HPPA
26 @set I960
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set SPU
38 @set TICOFF
39 @set WIN32
40 @set XTENSA
41 @end ifset
42 @c man end
43
44 @ifnottex
45 @dircategory Software development
46 @direntry
47 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
48 @end direntry
49 @end ifnottex
50
51 @copying
52 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55 @end ifset
56 version @value{VERSION}.
57
58 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59
60 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
61 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
62 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
65 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
66 @end copying
67 @iftex
68 @finalout
69 @setchapternewpage odd
70 @settitle The GNU linker
71 @titlepage
72 @title The GNU linker
73 @sp 1
74 @subtitle @code{ld}
75 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77 @end ifset
78 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79 @author Steve Chamberlain
80 @author Ian Lance Taylor
81 @page
82
83 @tex
84 {\parskip=0pt
85 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
87 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
88 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89 }
90 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91 @end tex
92
93 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
94 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
95 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
96
97 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
98 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
99 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
102 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
103 @c man end
104
105 @end titlepage
106 @end iftex
107 @contents
108 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
110 @ifnottex
111 @node Top
112 @top LD
113 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116 @end ifset
117 version @value{VERSION}.
118
119 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
120 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
122
123 @menu
124 * Overview:: Overview
125 * Invocation:: Invocation
126 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127 @ifset GENERIC
128 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129 @end ifset
130 @ifclear GENERIC
131 @ifset H8300
132 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133 @end ifset
134 @ifset Renesas
135 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
136 @end ifset
137 @ifset I960
138 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139 @end ifset
140 @ifset ARM
141 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142 @end ifset
143 @ifset M68HC11
144 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145 @end ifset
146 @ifset HPPA
147 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148 @end ifset
149 @ifset M68K
150 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151 @end ifset
152 @ifset MIPS
153 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154 @end ifset
155 @ifset POWERPC
156 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157 @end ifset
158 @ifset POWERPC64
159 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160 @end ifset
161 @ifset SPU
162 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163 @end ifset
164 @ifset TICOFF
165 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166 @end ifset
167 @ifset WIN32
168 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169 @end ifset
170 @ifset XTENSA
171 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172 @end ifset
173 @end ifclear
174 @ifclear SingleFormat
175 * BFD:: BFD
176 @end ifclear
177 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
181 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
182 * LD Index:: LD Index
183 @end menu
184 @end ifnottex
185
186 @node Overview
187 @chapter Overview
188
189 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190 @cindex what is this?
191
192 @ifset man
193 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
194 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
195 @c man end
196
197 @c man begin SEEALSO
198 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200 @file{ld}.
201 @c man end
202 @end ifset
203
204 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
206 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
207 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
208 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
209
210 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
211 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
214 @ifset man
215 @c For the man only
216 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
217 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
219 @end ifset
220
221 @ifclear SingleFormat
222 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
224 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227 @end ifclear
228
229 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
232 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
233 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
235 @c man end
236
237 @node Invocation
238 @chapter Invocation
239
240 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
242 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
243 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244 you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
246 @c man end
247
248 @ifset UsesEnvVars
249 @menu
250 * Options:: Command Line Options
251 * Environment:: Environment Variables
252 @end menu
253
254 @node Options
255 @section Command Line Options
256 @end ifset
257
258 @cindex command line
259 @cindex options
260
261 @c man begin OPTIONS
262
263 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265 @cindex standard Unix system
266 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
267 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268 link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270 @smallexample
271 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272 @end smallexample
273
274 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
275 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
279 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
280 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
285 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287 noted in the descriptions below.
288
289 @cindex object files
290 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293 an option and its argument.
294
295 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299 message @samp{No input files}.
300
301 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
302 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
307 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
312
313 For options whose names are a single letter,
314 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316 option that requires them.
317
318 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
319 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
320 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
321 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
322 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
323 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325 output.
326
327 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332 accepted.
333
334 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
336 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337 compiler driver) like this:
338
339 @smallexample
340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
341 @end smallexample
342
343 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
344 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351 @smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353 @end smallexample
354
355 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356 linker:
357
358 @table @gcctabopt
359 @include at-file.texi
360
361 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
362 @item -a @var{keyword}
363 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
369 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
376 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
377 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
378 interface.
379
380 @ifset I960
381 @cindex architectures
382 @kindex -A @var{arch}
383 @item -A @var{architecture}
384 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
386 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
388 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
390 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
391 family}, for details.
392
393 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
394 other architecture families.
395 @end ifset
396
397 @ifclear SingleFormat
398 @cindex binary input format
399 @kindex -b @var{format}
400 @kindex --format=@var{format}
401 @cindex input format
402 @cindex input format
403 @item -b @var{input-format}
404 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
405 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
407 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
408 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
409 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
410 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
411 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415 @xref{BFD}.
416
417 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419 linking object files of different formats), by including
420 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
421 particular format.
422
423 The default format is taken from the environment variable
424 @code{GNUTARGET}.
425 @ifset UsesEnvVars
426 @xref{Environment}.
427 @end ifset
428 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
429 @code{TARGET};
430 @ifclear man
431 see @ref{Format Commands}.
432 @end ifclear
433 @end ifclear
434
435 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437 @cindex compatibility, MRI
438 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
440 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
441 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
442 @ifclear man
443 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444 @end ifclear
445 @ifset man
446 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447 @end ifset
448 Introduce MRI script files with
449 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
450 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
452 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454 @cindex common allocation
455 @kindex -d
456 @kindex -dc
457 @kindex -dp
458 @item -d
459 @itemx -dc
460 @itemx -dp
461 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
467 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
476 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
477
478 @cindex entry point, from command line
479 @kindex -e @var{entry}
480 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
481 @item -e @var{entry}
482 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
491 @kindex --exclude-libs
492 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
494 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
495 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500 be treated as hidden.
501
502 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513 regardless of this option.
514
515 @cindex dynamic symbol table
516 @kindex -E
517 @kindex --export-dynamic
518 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
519 @item -E
520 @itemx --export-dynamic
521 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
522 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
531
532 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535 linking the program itself.
536
537 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
538 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
539 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
540
541 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
545 @ifclear SingleFormat
546 @cindex big-endian objects
547 @cindex endianness
548 @kindex -EB
549 @item -EB
550 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552 @cindex little-endian objects
553 @kindex -EL
554 @item -EL
555 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
556 @end ifclear
557
558 @kindex -f @var{name}
559 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560 @item -f @var{name}
561 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
562 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575 machine specific performance.
576
577 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
580 @kindex -F @var{name}
581 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
582 @item -F @var{name}
583 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
584 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595 @var{name}.
596
597 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
598 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
599 object files.
600 @ifclear SingleFormat
601 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
602 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
603 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
604 environment variable.
605 @end ifclear
606 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607 creating an ELF shared object.
608
609 @cindex finalization function
610 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
611 @item -fini=@var{name}
612 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615 the function to call.
616
617 @kindex -g
618 @item -g
619 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
621 @kindex -G @var{value}
622 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
623 @cindex object size
624 @item -G @var{value}
625 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
628 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
629 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631 @cindex runtime library name
632 @kindex -h @var{name}
633 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
634 @item -h @var{name}
635 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
636 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642 @kindex -i
643 @cindex incremental link
644 @item -i
645 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
647 @cindex initialization function
648 @kindex -init=@var{name}
649 @item -init=@var{name}
650 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653 function to call.
654
655 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
656 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
657 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
658 @item -l @var{namespec}
659 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
663 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
664 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
665
666 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
667 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673 @var{filename}.
674
675 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
682 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
683 archives multiple times.
684
685 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687 @ifset GENERIC
688 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
689 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
690 behaviour of the AIX linker.
691 @end ifset
692
693 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
694 @kindex -L @var{dir}
695 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
696 @item -L @var{searchdir}
697 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
698 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
700 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
703 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
704 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706 option is specified.
707
708 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
709 prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
710 @samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
711
712 @ifset UsesEnvVars
713 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
714 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
715 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716 @end ifset
717
718 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722 @cindex emulation
723 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
724 @item -m @var{emulation}
725 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732 configured.
733
734 @cindex link map
735 @kindex -M
736 @kindex --print-map
737 @item -M
738 @itemx --print-map
739 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740 information about the link, including the following:
741
742 @itemize @bullet
743 @item
744 Where object files are mapped into memory.
745 @item
746 How common symbols are allocated.
747 @item
748 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
750 @item
751 The values assigned to symbols.
752
753 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759 linker script containing:
760
761 @smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765 @end smallexample
766
767 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768 option is used:
769
770 @smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774 @end smallexample
775
776 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777 scripts.
778 @end itemize
779
780 @kindex -n
781 @cindex read-only text
782 @cindex NMAGIC
783 @kindex --nmagic
784 @item -n
785 @itemx --nmagic
786 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
789
790 @kindex -N
791 @kindex --omagic
792 @cindex read/write from cmd line
793 @cindex OMAGIC
794 @item -N
795 @itemx --omagic
796 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
797 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
799 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801 specification published by Microsoft.
802
803 @kindex --no-omagic
804 @cindex OMAGIC
805 @item --no-omagic
806 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
810
811 @kindex -o @var{output}
812 @kindex --output=@var{output}
813 @cindex naming the output file
814 @item -o @var{output}
815 @itemx --output=@var{output}
816 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
817 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820 @kindex -O @var{level}
821 @cindex generating optimized output
822 @item -O @var{level}
823 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
824 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
825 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
830
831 @kindex -plugin @var{name}
832 @item -plugin @var{name}
833 Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
834 the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
835 automatically added by the complier, when using link time
836 optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
837 wish.
838
839 Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
840 from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
841 @command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
842 those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
843 copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
844 based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
845 just copy in the newest one.
846
847 @kindex --push-state
848 @cindex push state governing input file handling
849 @item --push-state
850 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
851 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
852 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
853
854 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
855 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
856 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
857 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
858 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
859 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
860
861 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
862 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
863 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
864 something as follows:
865
866 @smallexample
867 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
868 @end smallexample
869
870 @kindex --pop-state
871 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
872 @item --pop-state
873 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
874 flags governing input file handling.
875
876 @kindex -q
877 @kindex --emit-relocs
878 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
879 @item -q
880 @itemx --emit-relocs
881 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
882 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
883 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
884 in larger executables.
885
886 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
887
888 @kindex --force-dynamic
889 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
890 @item --force-dynamic
891 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
892 to VxWorks targets.
893
894 @cindex partial link
895 @cindex relocatable output
896 @kindex -r
897 @kindex --relocatable
898 @item -r
899 @itemx --relocatable
900 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
901 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
902 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
903 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
904 @code{OMAGIC}.
905 @c ; see @option{-N}.
906 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
907 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
908 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
909
910 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
911 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
912 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
913 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
914 with input files in other formats at all.
915
916 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
917
918 @kindex -R @var{file}
919 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
920 @cindex symbol-only input
921 @item -R @var{filename}
922 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
923 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
924 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
925 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
926 programs. You may use this option more than once.
927
928 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
929 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
930 the @option{-rpath} option.
931
932 @kindex -s
933 @kindex --strip-all
934 @cindex strip all symbols
935 @item -s
936 @itemx --strip-all
937 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
938
939 @kindex -S
940 @kindex --strip-debug
941 @cindex strip debugger symbols
942 @item -S
943 @itemx --strip-debug
944 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
945
946 @kindex --strip-discarded
947 @kindex --no-strip-discarded
948 @item --strip-discarded
949 @itemx --no-strip-discarded
950 Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
951 Enabled by default.
952
953 @kindex -t
954 @kindex --trace
955 @cindex input files, displaying
956 @item -t
957 @itemx --trace
958 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
959
960 @kindex -T @var{script}
961 @kindex --script=@var{script}
962 @cindex script files
963 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
964 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
965 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
966 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
967 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
968 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
969 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
970 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
971 options accumulate.
972
973 @kindex -dT @var{script}
974 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
975 @cindex script files
976 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
977 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
978 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
979
980 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
981 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
982 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
983 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
984 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
985 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
986 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
987 @samp{gcc}).
988
989 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
990 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
991 @cindex undefined symbol
992 @item -u @var{symbol}
993 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
994 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
995 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
996 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
997 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
998 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
999
1000 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1001 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1002 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1003 instead.
1004
1005 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1006 @cindex symbols, require defined
1007 @cindex defined symbol
1008 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1009 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1010 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1011 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1012 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1013 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1014 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1015
1016 @kindex -Ur
1017 @cindex constructors
1018 @item -Ur
1019 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1020 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
1021 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
1022 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1023 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1024 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1025 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1026 @samp{-r} for the others.
1027
1028 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1029 @cindex orphan sections
1030 @cindex sections, orphan
1031 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1032 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1033 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1034
1035 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1036
1037 @table @code
1038 @item place
1039 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1040 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1041 @samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
1042
1043 @item discard
1044 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1045 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1046
1047 @item warn
1048 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1049 issue a warning.
1050
1051 @item error
1052 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1053 @end table
1054
1055 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1056
1057 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1058 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1059 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1060 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1061 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1062 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1063 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1064 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1065 in a linker script.
1066
1067 @kindex -v
1068 @kindex -V
1069 @kindex --version
1070 @cindex version
1071 @item -v
1072 @itemx --version
1073 @itemx -V
1074 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1075 lists the supported emulations.
1076
1077 @kindex -x
1078 @kindex --discard-all
1079 @cindex deleting local symbols
1080 @item -x
1081 @itemx --discard-all
1082 Delete all local symbols.
1083
1084 @kindex -X
1085 @kindex --discard-locals
1086 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1087 @item -X
1088 @itemx --discard-locals
1089 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1090 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1091 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1092
1093 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1094 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1095 @cindex symbol tracing
1096 @item -y @var{symbol}
1097 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1098 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1099 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1100 to prepend an underscore.
1101
1102 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1103 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1104
1105 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1106 @item -Y @var{path}
1107 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1108 for Solaris compatibility.
1109
1110 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1111 @item -z @var{keyword}
1112 The recognized keywords are:
1113 @table @samp
1114
1115 @item combreloc
1116 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1117 lookup caching possible.
1118
1119 @item common
1120 Generate common symbols with the STT_COMMON type druing a relocatable
1121 link.
1122
1123 @item defs
1124 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
1125 shared libraries are still allowed.
1126
1127 @item execstack
1128 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1129
1130 @item global
1131 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1132 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1133 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1134
1135 @item initfirst
1136 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1137 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1138 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1139 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1140 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1141 objects.
1142
1143 @item interpose
1144 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1145 but the primary executable.
1146
1147 @item lazy
1148 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1149 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1150 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1151 Lazy binding is the default.
1152
1153 @item loadfltr
1154 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1155 runtime.
1156
1157 @item muldefs
1158 Allows multiple definitions.
1159
1160 @item nocombreloc
1161 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1162
1163 @item nocommon
1164 Generate common symbols with the STT_OBJECT type druing a relocatable
1165 link.
1166
1167 @item nocopyreloc
1168 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1169 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1170
1171 @item nodefaultlib
1172 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1173 ignore any default library search paths.
1174
1175 @item nodelete
1176 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1177
1178 @item nodlopen
1179 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1180
1181 @item nodump
1182 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1183
1184 @item noexecstack
1185 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1186
1187 @item text
1188 Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1189
1190 @item notext
1191 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1192
1193 @item textoff
1194 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1195
1196 @item norelro
1197 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1198
1199 @item now
1200 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1201 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1202 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1203 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1204 first called.
1205
1206 @item origin
1207 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1208
1209 @item relro
1210 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1211
1212 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1213 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1214
1215 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1216 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1217
1218 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1219 Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1220 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1221 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1222
1223 @item bndplt
1224 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1225
1226 @item noextern-protected-data
1227 Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1228 library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1229 to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1230 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1231 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1232 i386 and x86-64.
1233
1234 @item dynamic-undefined-weak
1235 Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1236 if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1237 by symbol visibility or versioning. Not all targets support this
1238 option.
1239
1240 @item nodynamic-undefined-weak
1241 Do not make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic
1242 object. Not all targets support this option. If neither
1243 @option{-z nodynamic-undefined-weak} nor @option{-z dynamic-undefined-weak}
1244 are given, a target may default to either option being in force, or
1245 make some other selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic.
1246
1247 @item noreloc-overflow
1248 Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1249 relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1250 overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1251
1252 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1253 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1254 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1255 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1256 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1257 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1258 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1259 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1260 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1261 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1262 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1263
1264 @item ibtplt
1265 Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1266 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1267
1268 @item IBT
1269 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1270 to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1271 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1272
1273 @end table
1274
1275 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1276
1277 @kindex -(
1278 @cindex groups of archives
1279 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1280 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1281 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1282 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1283
1284 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1285 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1286 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1287 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1288 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1289 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1290 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1291 resolved.
1292
1293 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1294 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1295 more archives.
1296
1297 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1298 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1299 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1300 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1301 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1302 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1303 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1304 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1305 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1306 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1307 restore the old behaviour.
1308
1309 @kindex --as-needed
1310 @kindex --no-as-needed
1311 @item --as-needed
1312 @itemx --no-as-needed
1313 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1314 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1315 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1316 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1317 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1318 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1319 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1320 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1321 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1322 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1323 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1324 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1325 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1326
1327 @kindex --add-needed
1328 @kindex --no-add-needed
1329 @item --add-needed
1330 @itemx --no-add-needed
1331 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1332 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1333 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1334 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1335
1336 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1337 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1338 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1339
1340 @kindex -Bdynamic
1341 @kindex -dy
1342 @kindex -call_shared
1343 @item -Bdynamic
1344 @itemx -dy
1345 @itemx -call_shared
1346 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1347 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1348 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1349 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1350 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1351 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1352
1353 @kindex -Bgroup
1354 @item -Bgroup
1355 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1356 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1357 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1358 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1359 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1360
1361 @kindex -Bstatic
1362 @kindex -dn
1363 @kindex -non_shared
1364 @kindex -static
1365 @item -Bstatic
1366 @itemx -dn
1367 @itemx -non_shared
1368 @itemx -static
1369 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1370 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1371 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1372 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1373 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1374 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1375 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1376 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1377 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1378 libraries.
1379
1380 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1381 @item -Bsymbolic
1382 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1383 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1384 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1385 within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1386 @option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1387 executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1388 the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1389 support shared libraries and position independent executables.
1390
1391 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1392 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1393 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1394 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1395 This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1396 when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1397 to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
1398 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1399 libraries and position independent executables.
1400
1401 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1402 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1403 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1404 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1405 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1406 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1407 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1408 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1409 which support shared libraries.
1410
1411 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1412 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1413
1414 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1415 @item --dynamic-list-data
1416 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1417
1418 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1419 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1420 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1421 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1422
1423 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1424 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1425 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1426
1427 @kindex --check-sections
1428 @kindex --no-check-sections
1429 @item --check-sections
1430 @itemx --no-check-sections
1431 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1432 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1433 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1434 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1435 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1436 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1437 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1438 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1439 option.
1440
1441 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1442 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1443 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1444 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1445 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1446 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1447 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1448 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1449 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1450 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1451 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1452 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1453
1454 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1455 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1456 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1457 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1458 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1459 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1460 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1461 symbols.
1462
1463 @cindex cross reference table
1464 @kindex --cref
1465 @item --cref
1466 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1467 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1468 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1469
1470 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1471 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1472 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1473 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1474 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1475 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1476 symbol are listed.
1477
1478 @cindex common allocation
1479 @kindex --no-define-common
1480 @item --no-define-common
1481 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1482 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1483 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1484
1485 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1486 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1487 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1488 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1489 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1490 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1491 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1492 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1493 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1494 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1495
1496 @cindex group allocation in linker script
1497 @cindex section groups
1498 @cindex COMDAT
1499 @kindex --force-group-allocation
1500 @item --force-group-allocation
1501 This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1502 normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1503 default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1504 change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1505 command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1506 effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1507
1508 @cindex symbols, from command line
1509 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1510 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1511 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1512 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1513 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1514 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1515 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1516 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1517 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1518 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1519 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1520 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1521
1522 @cindex demangling, from command line
1523 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1524 @kindex --no-demangle
1525 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1526 @itemx --no-demangle
1527 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1528 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1529 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1530 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1531 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1532 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1533 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1534 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1535 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1536
1537 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1538 @kindex -I@var{file}
1539 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1540 @item -I@var{file}
1541 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1542 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1543 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1544 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1545 doing.
1546
1547 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1548 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1549 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1550 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1551 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1552 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1553
1554 @kindex --embedded-relocs
1555 @item --embedded-relocs
1556 This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1557 that the relocs are stored in a target specific section. This option
1558 is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1559 targets.
1560
1561 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1562 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1563 @item --fatal-warnings
1564 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1565 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1566 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1567
1568 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1569 @item --force-exe-suffix
1570 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1571
1572 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1573 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1574 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1575 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1576 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1577 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1578
1579 @kindex --gc-sections
1580 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1581 @cindex garbage collection
1582 @item --gc-sections
1583 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1584 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1585 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1586 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1587 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1588 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1589 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1590
1591 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1592 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1593 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1594 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1595 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1596 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1597 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1598 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1599 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1600
1601 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1602 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1603 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1604 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1605
1606 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1607 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1608 @cindex garbage collection
1609 @item --print-gc-sections
1610 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1611 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1612 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1613 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1614 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1615 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1616 line.
1617
1618 @kindex --gc-keep-exported
1619 @cindex garbage collection
1620 @item --gc-keep-exported
1621 When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1622 collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1623 default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1624 executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1625 collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1626 Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1627 it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1628 ELF format targets.
1629
1630 @kindex --print-output-format
1631 @cindex output format
1632 @item --print-output-format
1633 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1634 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1635 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1636
1637 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1638 @cindex memory usage
1639 @item --print-memory-usage
1640 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1641 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1642 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1643 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1644 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1645
1646 @smallexample
1647 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1648 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1649 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1650 @end smallexample
1651
1652 @cindex help
1653 @cindex usage
1654 @kindex --help
1655 @item --help
1656 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1657
1658 @kindex --target-help
1659 @item --target-help
1660 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1661
1662 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1663 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1664 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1665 @option{-M} option, above.
1666
1667 @cindex memory usage
1668 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1669 @item --no-keep-memory
1670 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1671 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1672 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1673 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1674 while linking a large executable.
1675
1676 @kindex --no-undefined
1677 @kindex -z defs
1678 @item --no-undefined
1679 @itemx -z defs
1680 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1681 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1682 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1683 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1684 libraries being linked in.
1685
1686 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1687 @kindex -z muldefs
1688 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1689 @itemx -z muldefs
1690 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1691 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1692 first definition will be used.
1693
1694 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1695 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1696 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1697 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1698 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1699 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1700 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1701 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1702 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1703
1704 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1705 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1706 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1707 a shared library.
1708
1709 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1710 libraries specified at link time are that:
1711
1712 @itemize @bullet
1713 @item
1714 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1715 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1716 resolvable at load time.
1717 @item
1718 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1719 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1720
1721 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1722 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1723 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1724 appropriate memset function.
1725 @end itemize
1726
1727 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1728 @item --no-undefined-version
1729 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1730 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1731 will be issued instead.
1732
1733 @kindex --default-symver
1734 @item --default-symver
1735 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1736 exported symbols.
1737
1738 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1739 @item --default-imported-symver
1740 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1741 imported symbols.
1742
1743 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1744 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1745 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1746 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1747 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1748 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1749 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1750 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1751 inappropriate.
1752
1753 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1754 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1755 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1756 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1757
1758 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1759 @item --no-whole-archive
1760 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1761 archive files.
1762
1763 @cindex output file after errors
1764 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1765 @item --noinhibit-exec
1766 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1767 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1768 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1769 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1770
1771 @kindex -nostdlib
1772 @item -nostdlib
1773 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1774 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1775 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1776
1777 @ifclear SingleFormat
1778 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1779 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1780 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1781 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1782 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1783 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1784 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1785 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1786 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1787 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1788 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1789 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1790 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1791 @end ifclear
1792
1793 @kindex --out-implib
1794 @item --out-implib @var{file}
1795 Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1796 the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1797 library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1798 may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1799 behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1800 step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1801 the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1802
1803 @kindex -pie
1804 @kindex --pic-executable
1805 @item -pie
1806 @itemx --pic-executable
1807 @cindex position independent executables
1808 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1809 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1810 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1811 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1812 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1813 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1814
1815 @kindex -qmagic
1816 @item -qmagic
1817 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1818
1819 @kindex -Qy
1820 @item -Qy
1821 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1822
1823 @kindex --relax
1824 @cindex synthesizing linker
1825 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1826 @cindex --no-relax
1827 @item --relax
1828 @itemx --no-relax
1829 An option with machine dependent effects.
1830 @ifset GENERIC
1831 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1832 @end ifset
1833 @ifset H8300
1834 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1835 @end ifset
1836 @ifset I960
1837 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1838 @end ifset
1839 @ifset XTENSA
1840 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1841 @end ifset
1842 @ifset M68HC11
1843 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1844 @end ifset
1845 @ifset NIOSII
1846 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1847 @end ifset
1848 @ifset POWERPC
1849 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1850 @end ifset
1851
1852 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1853 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1854 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1855 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1856 instructions, and combining constant values.
1857
1858 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1859 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1860 @ifset GENERIC
1861 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1862 family of processors.
1863 @end ifset
1864
1865 @ifset GENERIC
1866 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1867 but ignored.
1868 @end ifset
1869
1870 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1871 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1872
1873 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1874 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1875 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1876 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1877 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1878 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1879 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1880 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1881 @ifset GENERIC
1882 (such as VxWorks)
1883 @end ifset
1884 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1885 run-time memory.
1886
1887 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1888 or symbols needed for relocations.
1889
1890 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1891 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1892
1893 @ifset GENERIC
1894 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1895 @cindex runtime library search path
1896 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1897 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1898 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1899 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1900 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1901 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1902 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1903 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1904 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1905 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1906
1907 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1908 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
1909 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1910 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1911 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1912 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1913 file systems.
1914
1915 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1916 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1917 the @option{-rpath} option.
1918 @end ifset
1919
1920 @ifset GENERIC
1921 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1922 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1923 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1924 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1925 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1926 of the input files.
1927
1928 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1929 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1930 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1931 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1932 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1933 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1934 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1935 appearing multiple times.
1936
1937 The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1938 directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1939 containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1940 and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
1941 64-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1942
1943 The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1944 @var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1945 supported.
1946
1947 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1948 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1949 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1950 runtime linker would do.
1951
1952 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1953 libraries:
1954 @enumerate
1955 @item
1956 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1957 @item
1958 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1959 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1960 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1961 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1962 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1963 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1964 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1965 @item
1966 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1967 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1968 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1969 @item
1970 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1971 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1972 @item
1973 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
1974 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1975 @item
1976 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1977 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1978 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1979 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1980 @item
1981 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1982 @item
1983 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1984 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1985 @end enumerate
1986
1987 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1988 warning and continue with the link.
1989 @end ifset
1990
1991 @kindex -shared
1992 @kindex -Bshareable
1993 @item -shared
1994 @itemx -Bshareable
1995 @cindex shared libraries
1996 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1997 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1998 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1999 undefined symbols in the link.
2000
2001 @kindex --sort-common
2002 @item --sort-common
2003 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
2004 @itemx --sort-common=descending
2005 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2006 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2007 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2008 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2009 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2010 specified, then descending order is assumed.
2011
2012 @kindex --sort-section=name
2013 @item --sort-section=name
2014 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2015 patterns in the linker script.
2016
2017 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
2018 @item --sort-section=alignment
2019 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2020 patterns in the linker script.
2021
2022 @kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2023 @item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2024 This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2025 .dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2026 post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2027
2028 @kindex --split-by-file
2029 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
2030 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
2031 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2032 size of 1 if not given.
2033
2034 @kindex --split-by-reloc
2035 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
2036 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
2037 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
2038 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
2039 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2040 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2041 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2042 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2043 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2044 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
2045 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
2046
2047 @kindex --stats
2048 @item --stats
2049 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2050 as execution time and memory usage.
2051
2052 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
2053 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2054 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2055 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2056 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2057
2058 @kindex --task-link
2059 @item --task-link
2060 This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2061 file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2062
2063 @kindex --traditional-format
2064 @cindex traditional format
2065 @item --traditional-format
2066 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2067 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
2068 use the traditional format instead.
2069
2070 @cindex dbx
2071 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
2072 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2073 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2074 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
2075 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
2076 combine duplicate entries.
2077
2078 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2079 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2080 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2081 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2082 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2083 line.
2084 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2085 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2086 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2087 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2088 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2089
2090 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2091 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2092 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
2093 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
2094 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
2095 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2096 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2097 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
2098 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
2099
2100 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2101 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2102 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2103 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2104 byte of the text segment.
2105
2106 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2107 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2108 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2109 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2110 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2111 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2112
2113 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2114 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2115 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2116 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2117 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2118
2119 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
2120 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2121 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2122 values for @samp{method}:
2123
2124 @table @samp
2125 @item ignore-all
2126 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2127
2128 @item report-all
2129 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2130
2131 @item ignore-in-object-files
2132 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2133 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2134
2135 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2136 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2137 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2138 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2139 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2140 command line.
2141 @end table
2142
2143 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2144 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2145
2146 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2147 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2148 can change this to a warning.
2149
2150 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2151 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2152 @item --dll-verbose
2153 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2154 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2155 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2156 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2157 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2158
2159 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2160 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2161 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2162 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2163 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2164 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2165 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2166 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2167 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2168 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2169 @xref{WIN32}.
2170
2171 @kindex --warn-common
2172 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2173 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2174 @item --warn-common
2175 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2176 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2177 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2178 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2179 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2180 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2181
2182 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2183
2184 @table @samp
2185 @item int i = 1;
2186 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2187 file.
2188
2189 @item extern int i;
2190 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2191 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2192 variable somewhere.
2193
2194 @item int i;
2195 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2196 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2197 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2198 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2199 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2200 a definition of the same variable.
2201 @end table
2202
2203 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2204 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2205 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2206 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2207 a common symbol.
2208
2209 @enumerate
2210 @item
2211 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2212 definition for the symbol.
2213 @smallexample
2214 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2215 overridden by definition
2216 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2217 @end smallexample
2218
2219 @item
2220 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2221 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2222 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2223 @smallexample
2224 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2225 overriding common
2226 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2227 @end smallexample
2228
2229 @item
2230 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2231 @smallexample
2232 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2233 of `@var{symbol}'
2234 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2235 @end smallexample
2236
2237 @item
2238 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2239 @smallexample
2240 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2241 overridden by larger common
2242 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2243 @end smallexample
2244
2245 @item
2246 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2247 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2248 encountered in a different order.
2249 @smallexample
2250 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2251 overriding smaller common
2252 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2253 @end smallexample
2254 @end enumerate
2255
2256 @kindex --warn-constructors
2257 @item --warn-constructors
2258 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2259 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2260 detect the use of global constructors.
2261
2262 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2263 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2264 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2265 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2266 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2267 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2268 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2269 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2270 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2271 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2272 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2273 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2274 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2275
2276 @kindex --warn-once
2277 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2278 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2279 @item --warn-once
2280 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2281 which refers to it.
2282
2283 @kindex --warn-section-align
2284 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2285 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2286 @item --warn-section-align
2287 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2288 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2289 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2290 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2291 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2292
2293 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2294 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2295 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2296
2297 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2298 @item --warn-alternate-em
2299 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2300
2301 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2302 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2303 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2304 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2305 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2306
2307 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2308 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2309 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2310 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2311
2312 @kindex --whole-archive
2313 @cindex including an entire archive
2314 @item --whole-archive
2315 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2316 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2317 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2318 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2319 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2320 library. This option may be used more than once.
2321
2322 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2323 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2324 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2325 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2326 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2327
2328 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2329 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2330 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2331 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2332 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2333 @var{symbol}.
2334
2335 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2336 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2337 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2338 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2339
2340 Here is a trivial example:
2341
2342 @smallexample
2343 void *
2344 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2345 @{
2346 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2347 return __real_malloc (c);
2348 @}
2349 @end smallexample
2350
2351 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2352 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2353 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2354 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2355
2356 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2357 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2358 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2359 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2360 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2361
2362 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2363 @kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
2364 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2365 @itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2366 Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2367 (@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2368 section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2369
2370 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2371 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2372 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2373 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2374 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2375
2376 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2377 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2378 @item --enable-new-dtags
2379 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2380 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2381 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2382 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2383 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2384 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2385 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2386 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2387
2388 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2389 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2390 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2391 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2392 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2393 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2394 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2395
2396 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2397 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2398 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2399 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2400 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2401 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2402 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2403
2404 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2405 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2406 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2407 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2408 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2409 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2410 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2411 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2412 On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2413 compressed using zlib.
2414
2415 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2416 sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2417 DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2418 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2419 also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2420 sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2421
2422 The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2423 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2424
2425 Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2426 sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2427 for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2428 uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2429
2430 The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2431 involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2432 default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2433 @option{--help} option.
2434
2435 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2436 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2437 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2438 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2439 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2440 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2441
2442 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2443 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2444 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2445 has been used.
2446
2447 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2448 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2449
2450 @kindex --build-id
2451 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2452 @item --build-id
2453 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2454 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2455 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2456 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2457 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2458 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2459 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2460 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2461 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2462 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2463 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2464
2465 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2466 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2467 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2468 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2469 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2470 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2471
2472 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2473 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2474 @end table
2475
2476 @c man end
2477
2478 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2479
2480 @c man begin OPTIONS
2481
2482 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2483 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2484 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2485 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2486 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2487 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2488 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2489 object file).
2490
2491 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2492 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2493 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2494 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2495
2496 @table @gcctabopt
2497
2498 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2499 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2500 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2501 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2502 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2503
2504 @kindex --base-file
2505 @item --base-file @var{file}
2506 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2507 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2508 @file{dlltool}.
2509 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2510
2511 @kindex --dll
2512 @item --dll
2513 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2514 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2515 file.
2516 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2517
2518 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2519 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2520 @item --enable-long-section-names
2521 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2522 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2523 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2524 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2525 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2526 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2527 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2528 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2529 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2530 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2531 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2532 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2533 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2534 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2535 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2536 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2537 image and not stripping symbols.
2538 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2539
2540 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2541 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2542 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2543 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2544 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2545 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2546 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2547 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2548 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2549 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2550 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2551 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2552 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2553 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2554 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2555 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2556 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2557 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2558
2559 @kindex --leading-underscore
2560 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2561 @item --leading-underscore
2562 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2563 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2564 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2565 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2566
2567 @cindex DLLs, creating
2568 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2569 @item --export-all-symbols
2570 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2571 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2572 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2573 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2574 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2575 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2576 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2577 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2578 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2579 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2580 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2581 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2582 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2583 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2584 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2585 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2586 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2587 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2588 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2589 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2590 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2591 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2592 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2593
2594 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2595 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2596 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2597 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2598 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2599
2600 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2601 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2602 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2603 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2604
2605 @kindex --file-alignment
2606 @item --file-alignment
2607 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2608 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2609 512.
2610 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2611
2612 @cindex heap size
2613 @kindex --heap
2614 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2615 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2616 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2617 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2618 committed.
2619 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2620
2621 @cindex image base
2622 @kindex --image-base
2623 @item --image-base @var{value}
2624 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2625 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2626 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2627 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2628 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2629 for dlls.
2630 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2631
2632 @kindex --kill-at
2633 @item --kill-at
2634 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2635 symbols before they are exported.
2636 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2637
2638 @kindex --large-address-aware
2639 @item --large-address-aware
2640 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2641 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2642 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2643 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2644 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2645 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2646
2647 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2648 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2649 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2650 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2651 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2652 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2653 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2654
2655 @kindex --major-image-version
2656 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2657 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2658 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2659
2660 @kindex --major-os-version
2661 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2662 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2663 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2664
2665 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2666 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2667 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2668 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2669
2670 @kindex --minor-image-version
2671 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2672 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2673 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2674
2675 @kindex --minor-os-version
2676 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2677 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2678 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2679
2680 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2681 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2682 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2683 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2684
2685 @cindex DEF files, creating
2686 @cindex DLLs, creating
2687 @kindex --output-def
2688 @item --output-def @var{file}
2689 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2690 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2691 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2692 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2693 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2694 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2695
2696 @cindex DLLs, creating
2697 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2698 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2699 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2700 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2701 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2702 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2703 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2704 execution are avoided.
2705 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2706
2707 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2708 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2709 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2710 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2711 default.
2712 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2713
2714 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2715 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2716 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2717 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2718 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2719 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2720 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2721 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2722 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2723 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2724
2725 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2726 @item --enable-auto-import
2727 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2728 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2729 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2730 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2731 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2732 specification published by Microsoft.
2733
2734 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2735 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2736 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2737 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2738 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2739
2740 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2741 see this message:
2742
2743 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2744 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2745
2746 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2747 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2748 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2749 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2750 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2751 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2752 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2753 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2754 the warning, and exit.
2755
2756 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2757 data type of the exported variable:
2758
2759 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2760 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2761 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2762
2763 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2764 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2765 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2766 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2767
2768 @example
2769 extern type extern_array[];
2770 extern_array[1] -->
2771 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2772 @end example
2773
2774 or
2775
2776 @example
2777 extern type extern_array[];
2778 extern_array[1] -->
2779 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2780 @end example
2781
2782 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2783 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2784
2785 @example
2786 extern struct s extern_struct;
2787 extern_struct.field -->
2788 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2789 @end example
2790
2791 or
2792
2793 @example
2794 extern long long extern_ll;
2795 extern_ll -->
2796 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2797 @end example
2798
2799 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2800 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2801 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2802 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2803 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2804 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2805 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2806 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2807
2808 Original:
2809 @example
2810 --foo.h
2811 extern int arr[];
2812 --foo.c
2813 #include "foo.h"
2814 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2815 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2816 @}
2817 @end example
2818
2819 Solution 1:
2820 @example
2821 --foo.h
2822 extern int arr[];
2823 --foo.c
2824 #include "foo.h"
2825 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2826 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2827 volatile int *parr = arr;
2828 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2829 @}
2830 @end example
2831
2832 Solution 2:
2833 @example
2834 --foo.h
2835 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2836 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2837 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2838 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2839 #else
2840 #define FOO_IMPORT
2841 #endif
2842 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2843 --foo.c
2844 #include "foo.h"
2845 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2846 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2847 @}
2848 @end example
2849
2850 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2851 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2852 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2853 functions).
2854 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2855
2856 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2857 @item --disable-auto-import
2858 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2859 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2860 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2861
2862 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2863 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2864 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2865 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2866 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2867 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2868 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2869
2870 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2871 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2872 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2873 DLLs.
2874 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2875
2876 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2877 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2878 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2879 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2880
2881 @kindex --section-alignment
2882 @item --section-alignment
2883 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2884 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2885 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2886
2887 @cindex stack size
2888 @kindex --stack
2889 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2890 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2891 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2892 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2893 committed.
2894 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2895
2896 @kindex --subsystem
2897 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2898 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2899 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2900 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2901 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2902 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2903 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2904 @var{which}.
2905 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2906
2907 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2908 of the PE file header:
2909 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2910
2911 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2912 @item --high-entropy-va
2913 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2914 (ASLR).
2915
2916 @kindex --dynamicbase
2917 @item --dynamicbase
2918 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2919 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2920 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2921
2922 @kindex --forceinteg
2923 @item --forceinteg
2924 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2925
2926 @kindex --nxcompat
2927 @item --nxcompat
2928 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2929 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2930
2931 @kindex --no-isolation
2932 @item --no-isolation
2933 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2934
2935 @kindex --no-seh
2936 @item --no-seh
2937 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2938 this image.
2939
2940 @kindex --no-bind
2941 @item --no-bind
2942 Do not bind this image.
2943
2944 @kindex --wdmdriver
2945 @item --wdmdriver
2946 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2947
2948 @kindex --tsaware
2949 @item --tsaware
2950 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2951
2952 @kindex --insert-timestamp
2953 @item --insert-timestamp
2954 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2955 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2956 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2957 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2958 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
2959 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2960 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2961 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
2962 identically.
2963 @end table
2964
2965 @c man end
2966
2967 @ifset C6X
2968 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2969
2970 @c man begin OPTIONS
2971
2972 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2973 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2974 all executables use an index of 0.
2975
2976 @table @gcctabopt
2977
2978 @kindex --dsbt-size
2979 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2980 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
2981 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2982 entries.
2983
2984 @kindex --dsbt-index
2985 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2986 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2987 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2988 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2989 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2990
2991 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2992 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2993 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2994
2995 @end table
2996
2997 @c man end
2998 @end ifset
2999
3000 @ifset M68HC11
3001 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3002
3003 @c man begin OPTIONS
3004
3005 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3006 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3007
3008 @table @gcctabopt
3009
3010 @kindex --no-trampoline
3011 @item --no-trampoline
3012 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3013 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3014 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3015
3016 @kindex --bank-window
3017 @item --bank-window @var{name}
3018 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3019 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3020 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3021 paging and addresses within the memory window.
3022
3023 @end table
3024
3025 @c man end
3026 @end ifset
3027
3028 @ifset M68K
3029 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3030
3031 @c man begin OPTIONS
3032
3033 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3034 when linking for 68K targets.
3035
3036 @table @gcctabopt
3037
3038 @kindex --got
3039 @item --got=@var{type}
3040 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3041 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3042 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3043 Info entry for @file{ld}.
3044
3045 @end table
3046
3047 @c man end
3048 @end ifset
3049
3050 @ifset MIPS
3051 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3052
3053 @c man begin OPTIONS
3054
3055 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
3056 generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3057 linking for MIPS targets.
3058
3059 @table @gcctabopt
3060
3061 @kindex --insn32
3062 @item --insn32
3063 @kindex --no-insn32
3064 @itemx --no-insn32
3065 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3066 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3067 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
3068 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3069 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3070 possible.
3071
3072 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3073 @item --ignore-branch-isa
3074 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3075 @itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3076 These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3077 transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3078 accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3079 is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3080 instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3081 equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3082 calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3083 a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3084 an error.
3085
3086 @end table
3087
3088 @c man end
3089 @end ifset
3090
3091 @ifset UsesEnvVars
3092 @node Environment
3093 @section Environment Variables
3094
3095 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3096
3097 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
3098 @ifclear SingleFormat
3099 @code{GNUTARGET},
3100 @end ifclear
3101 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
3102
3103 @ifclear SingleFormat
3104 @kindex GNUTARGET
3105 @cindex default input format
3106 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3107 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3108 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
3109 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
3110 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3111 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3112 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3113 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3114 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3115 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3116 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
3117 @end ifclear
3118
3119 @kindex LDEMULATION
3120 @cindex default emulation
3121 @cindex emulation, default
3122 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3123 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3124 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3125 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3126 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3127 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3128 linker was configured.
3129
3130 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3131 @cindex demangling, default
3132 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3133 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3134 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3135 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3136 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3137 options.
3138
3139 @c man end
3140 @end ifset
3141
3142 @node Scripts
3143 @chapter Linker Scripts
3144
3145 @cindex scripts
3146 @cindex linker scripts
3147 @cindex command files
3148 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3149 written in the linker command language.
3150
3151 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3152 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3153 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3154 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3155 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3156 described below.
3157
3158 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3159 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3160 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3161 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3162 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3163
3164 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3165 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3166 default linker script.
3167
3168 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3169 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3170 Linker Scripts}.
3171
3172 @menu
3173 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3174 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3175 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3176 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3177 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3178 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3179 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3180 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3181 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3182 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3183 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3184 @end menu
3185
3186 @node Basic Script Concepts
3187 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3188 @cindex linker script concepts
3189 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3190 describe the linker script language.
3191
3192 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3193 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3194 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3195 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3196 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3197 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3198 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3199 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3200
3201 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3202 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3203 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3204 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3205 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3206 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3207 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3208 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3209 of debugging information.
3210
3211 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3212 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3213 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3214 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3215 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3216 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3217 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3218 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3219 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3220 RAM address would be the VMA.
3221
3222 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3223 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3224
3225 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3226 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3227 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3228 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3229 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3230 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3231 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3232
3233 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3234 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3235 option.
3236
3237 @node Script Format
3238 @section Linker Script Format
3239 @cindex linker script format
3240 Linker scripts are text files.
3241
3242 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3243 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3244 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3245 generally ignored.
3246
3247 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3248 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3249 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3250 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3251 file name.
3252
3253 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3254 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3255 to whitespace.
3256
3257 @node Simple Example
3258 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3259 @cindex linker script example
3260 @cindex example of linker script
3261 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3262
3263 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3264 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3265 memory layout of the output file.
3266
3267 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3268 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3269 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3270 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3271 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3272 your input files.
3273
3274 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3275 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3276 linker script which will do that:
3277 @smallexample
3278 SECTIONS
3279 @{
3280 . = 0x10000;
3281 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3282 . = 0x8000000;
3283 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3284 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3285 @}
3286 @end smallexample
3287
3288 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3289 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3290 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3291
3292 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3293 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3294 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3295 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3296 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3297 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3298 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3299
3300 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3301 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3302 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3303 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3304 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3305 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3306
3307 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3308 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3309 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3310
3311 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3312 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3313 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3314 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3315 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3316 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3317 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3318
3319 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3320 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3321 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3322 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3323 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3324 sections.
3325
3326 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3327
3328 @node Simple Commands
3329 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3330 @cindex linker script simple commands
3331 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3332
3333 @menu
3334 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3335 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3336 @ifclear SingleFormat
3337 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3338 @end ifclear
3339
3340 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3341 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3342 @end menu
3343
3344 @node Entry Point
3345 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3346 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3347 @cindex start of execution
3348 @cindex first instruction
3349 @cindex entry point
3350 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3351 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3352 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3353 @smallexample
3354 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3355 @end smallexample
3356
3357 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3358 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3359 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3360 @itemize @bullet
3361 @item
3362 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3363 @item
3364 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3365 @item
3366 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3367 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3368 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3369 @item
3370 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3371 @item
3372 The address @code{0}.
3373 @end itemize
3374
3375 @node File Commands
3376 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3377 @cindex linker script file commands
3378 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3379
3380 @table @code
3381 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3382 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3383 @cindex including a linker script
3384 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3385 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3386 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3387 10 levels deep.
3388
3389 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3390 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3391
3392 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3393 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3394 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3395 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3396 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3397 @cindex linker script input object files
3398 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3399 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3400
3401 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3402 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3403 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3404
3405 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3406 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3407
3408 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3409 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3410 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3411 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3412 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3413 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3414 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3415 as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3416 path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3417 @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3418
3419 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3420 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3421 @samp{-l}.
3422
3423 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3424 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3425 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3426
3427 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3428 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3429 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3430 @cindex grouping input files
3431 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3432 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3433 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3434 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3435
3436 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3437 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3438 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3439 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3440 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3441 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3442 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3443 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3444 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3445 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3446 setting afterwards.
3447
3448 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3449 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3450 @cindex output file name in linker script
3451 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3452 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3453 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3454 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3455 precedence.
3456
3457 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3458 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3459
3460 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3461 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3462 @cindex library search path in linker script
3463 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3464 @cindex search path in linker script
3465 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3466 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3467 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3468 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3469 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3470 the command line option are searched first.
3471
3472 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3473 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3474 @cindex first input file
3475 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3476 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3477 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3478 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3479 first file.
3480 @end table
3481
3482 @ifclear SingleFormat
3483 @node Format Commands
3484 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3485 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3486
3487 @table @code
3488 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3489 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3490 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3491 @cindex output file format in linker script
3492 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3493 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3494 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3495 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3496 line option takes precedence.
3497
3498 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3499 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3500 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3501 desired endianness.
3502
3503 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3504 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3505 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3506 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3507
3508 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3509 command:
3510 @smallexample
3511 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3512 @end smallexample
3513 This says that the default format for the output file is
3514 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3515 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3516 format.
3517
3518 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3519 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3520 @cindex input file format in linker script
3521 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3522 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3523 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3524 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3525 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3526 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3527 @end table
3528 @end ifclear
3529
3530 @node REGION_ALIAS
3531 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3532 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3533 @cindex region alias
3534 @cindex region names
3535
3536 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3537 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3538
3539 @smallexample
3540 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3541 @end smallexample
3542
3543 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3544 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3545 to memory regions. An example follows.
3546
3547 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3548 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3549 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3550 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3551 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3552 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3553 sections:
3554
3555 @itemize @bullet
3556 @item
3557 @code{.text} program code;
3558 @item
3559 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3560 @item
3561 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3562 @item
3563 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3564 @end itemize
3565
3566 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3567 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3568 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3569 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3570 @code{C}:
3571 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3572 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3573 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3574 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3575 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3576 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3577 @end multitable
3578 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3579 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3580 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3581 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3582
3583 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3584 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3585 memory layout:
3586 @smallexample
3587 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3588
3589 SECTIONS
3590 @{
3591 .text :
3592 @{
3593 *(.text)
3594 @} > REGION_TEXT
3595 .rodata :
3596 @{
3597 *(.rodata)
3598 rodata_end = .;
3599 @} > REGION_RODATA
3600 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3601 @{
3602 data_start = .;
3603 *(.data)
3604 @} > REGION_DATA
3605 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3606 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3607 .bss :
3608 @{
3609 *(.bss)
3610 @} > REGION_BSS
3611 @}
3612 @end smallexample
3613
3614 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3615 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3616 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3617 @table @code
3618 @item A
3619 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3620 @smallexample
3621 MEMORY
3622 @{
3623 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3624 @}
3625
3626 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3627 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3628 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3629 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3630 @end smallexample
3631 @item B
3632 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3633 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3634 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3635 @smallexample
3636 MEMORY
3637 @{
3638 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3639 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3640 @}
3641
3642 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3643 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3644 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3645 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3646 @end smallexample
3647 @item C
3648 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3649 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3650 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3651 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3652 @smallexample
3653 MEMORY
3654 @{
3655 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3656 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3657 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3658 @}
3659
3660 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3661 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3662 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3663 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3664 @end smallexample
3665 @end table
3666
3667 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3668 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3669 necessary:
3670 @smallexample
3671 #include <string.h>
3672
3673 extern char data_start [];
3674 extern char data_size [];
3675 extern char data_load_start [];
3676
3677 void copy_data(void)
3678 @{
3679 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3680 @{
3681 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3682 @}
3683 @}
3684 @end smallexample
3685
3686 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3687 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3688 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3689
3690 @table @code
3691 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3692 @kindex ASSERT
3693 @cindex assertion in linker script
3694 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3695 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3696
3697 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3698 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3699 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3700 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3701 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3702
3703 @smallexample
3704 .stack :
3705 @{
3706 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3707 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3708 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3709 @}
3710 @end smallexample
3711
3712 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3713 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3714 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3715
3716 @smallexample
3717 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3718 .stack :
3719 @{
3720 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3721 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3722 @}
3723 @end smallexample
3724
3725 will work.
3726
3727 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3728 @kindex EXTERN
3729 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3730 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3731 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3732 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3733 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3734 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3735
3736 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3737 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3738 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3739 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3740 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3741 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3742
3743 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3744 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3745 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3746 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3747 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3748 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3749
3750 @item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3751 @kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3752 @cindex group allocation in linker script
3753 @cindex section groups
3754 @cindex COMDAT
3755 This command has the same effect as the
3756 @samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3757 @command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3758 and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3759 specified (@samp{-r}).
3760
3761 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3762 @kindex INSERT
3763 @cindex insert user script into default script
3764 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3765 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3766 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3767 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3768 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3769 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3770 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3771 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3772 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3773 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3774 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3775 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3776 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3777
3778 @smallexample
3779 SECTIONS
3780 @{
3781 OVERLAY :
3782 @{
3783 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3784 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3785 @}
3786 @}
3787 INSERT AFTER .text;
3788 @end smallexample
3789
3790 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3791 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3792 @cindex cross references
3793 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3794 references among certain output sections.
3795
3796 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3797 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3798 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3799 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3800 a function defined in the other section.
3801
3802 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3803 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3804 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3805 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3806 names.
3807
3808 @item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3809 @kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3810 @cindex cross references
3811 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3812 references to one section from a list of other sections.
3813
3814 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3815 output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3816 a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3817 there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3818 must never call back.
3819
3820 The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3821 The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3822 If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3823 the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3824 status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3825 names, not input section names.
3826
3827 @ifclear SingleFormat
3828 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3829 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3830 @cindex machine architecture
3831 @cindex architecture
3832 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3833 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3834 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3835 the @samp{-f} option.
3836 @end ifclear
3837
3838 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3839 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3840 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3841 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3842 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3843 @xref{Expression Section}.
3844 @end table
3845
3846 @node Assignments
3847 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3848 @cindex assignment in scripts
3849 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3850 @cindex variables, defining
3851 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3852 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3853
3854 @menu
3855 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3856 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3857 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3858 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3859 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3860 @end menu
3861
3862 @node Simple Assignments
3863 @subsection Simple Assignments
3864
3865 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3866
3867 @table @code
3868 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3869 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3870 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3871 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3872 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3873 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3874 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3875 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3876 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3877 @end table
3878
3879 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3880 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3881 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3882
3883 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3884 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3885
3886 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3887
3888 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3889
3890 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3891 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3892 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3893
3894 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3895 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3896
3897 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3898 assignments may be used:
3899
3900 @smallexample
3901 floating_point = 0;
3902 SECTIONS
3903 @{
3904 .text :
3905 @{
3906 *(.text)
3907 _etext = .;
3908 @}
3909 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3910 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3911 @}
3912 @end smallexample
3913 @noindent
3914 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3915 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3916 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3917 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3918 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3919
3920 @node HIDDEN
3921 @subsection HIDDEN
3922 @cindex HIDDEN
3923 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3924 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3925
3926 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3927 @code{HIDDEN}:
3928
3929 @smallexample
3930 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3931 SECTIONS
3932 @{
3933 .text :
3934 @{
3935 *(.text)
3936 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3937 @}
3938 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3939 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3940 @}
3941 @end smallexample
3942 @noindent
3943 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3944
3945 @node PROVIDE
3946 @subsection PROVIDE
3947 @cindex PROVIDE
3948 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3949 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3950 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3951 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3952 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3953 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3954 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3955 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3956
3957 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3958 @smallexample
3959 SECTIONS
3960 @{
3961 .text :
3962 @{
3963 *(.text)
3964 _etext = .;
3965 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3966 @}
3967 @}
3968 @end smallexample
3969
3970 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3971 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3972 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3973 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3974 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3975 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3976
3977 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3978 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3979 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3980 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3981 hidden and won't be exported.
3982
3983 @node Source Code Reference
3984 @subsection Source Code Reference
3985
3986 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3987 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3988 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3989 symbol that does not have a value.
3990
3991 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3992 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3993 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3994 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3995 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3996 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3997 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3998 linker script variable might be referred to as:
3999
4000 @smallexample
4001 extern int foo;
4002 @end smallexample
4003
4004 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4005
4006 @smallexample
4007 _foo = 1000;
4008 @end smallexample
4009
4010 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4011 transformation has taken place.
4012
4013 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4014 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4015 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4016 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4017 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4018 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4019 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4020
4021 @smallexample
4022 int foo = 1000;
4023 @end smallexample
4024
4025 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
4026 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4027 number 1000 is initially stored.
4028
4029 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4030 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4031 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4032 So:
4033
4034 @smallexample
4035 foo = 1;
4036 @end smallexample
4037
4038 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4039 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4040 address. Whereas:
4041
4042 @smallexample
4043 int * a = & foo;
4044 @end smallexample
4045
4046 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
4047 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4048 the variable @samp{a}.
4049
4050 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4051 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4052 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4053
4054 @smallexample
4055 foo = 1000;
4056 @end smallexample
4057
4058 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4059 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4060 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4061 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4062 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4063
4064 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4065 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4066 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4067 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4068 linker script contains these declarations:
4069
4070 @smallexample
4071 @group
4072 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
4073 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
4074 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4075 @end group
4076 @end smallexample
4077
4078 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4079
4080 @smallexample
4081 @group
4082 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
4083
4084 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4085 @end group
4086 @end smallexample
4087
4088 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
4089 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4090 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4091
4092 @smallexample
4093 @group
4094 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4095
4096 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4097 @end group
4098 @end smallexample
4099
4100 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4101 operators.
4102
4103 @node SECTIONS
4104 @section SECTIONS Command
4105 @kindex SECTIONS
4106 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4107 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4108
4109 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4110 @smallexample
4111 SECTIONS
4112 @{
4113 @var{sections-command}
4114 @var{sections-command}
4115 @dots{}
4116 @}
4117 @end smallexample
4118
4119 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4120
4121 @itemize @bullet
4122 @item
4123 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4124 @item
4125 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4126 @item
4127 an output section description
4128 @item
4129 an overlay description
4130 @end itemize
4131
4132 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4133 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4134 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4135 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4136 the layout of the output file.
4137
4138 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4139 below.
4140
4141 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4142 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4143 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4144 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4145 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4146 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4147
4148 @menu
4149 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
4150 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
4151 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
4152 * Input Section:: Input section description
4153 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
4154 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4155 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4156 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4157 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4158 @end menu
4159
4160 @node Output Section Description
4161 @subsection Output Section Description
4162 The full description of an output section looks like this:
4163 @smallexample
4164 @group
4165 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4166 [AT(@var{lma})]
4167 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4168 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4169 [@var{constraint}]
4170 @{
4171 @var{output-section-command}
4172 @var{output-section-command}
4173 @dots{}
4174 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4175 @end group
4176 @end smallexample
4177
4178 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4179
4180 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4181 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4182 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4183 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4184 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4185
4186 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4187
4188 @itemize @bullet
4189 @item
4190 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4191 @item
4192 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4193 @item
4194 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4195 @item
4196 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4197 @end itemize
4198
4199 @node Output Section Name
4200 @subsection Output Section Name
4201 @cindex name, section
4202 @cindex section name
4203 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4204 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4205 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4206 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4207 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4208 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4209 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4210 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4211 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4212 commas must be quoted.
4213
4214 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4215 Discarding}.
4216
4217 @node Output Section Address
4218 @subsection Output Section Address
4219 @cindex address, section
4220 @cindex section address
4221 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4222 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4223 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4224
4225 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4226 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4227 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4228 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4229 contained within the output section.
4230
4231 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4232
4233 @itemize @bullet
4234 @item
4235 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4236 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4237 in that region.
4238
4239 @item
4240 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4241 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4242 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4243 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4244
4245 @item
4246 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4247 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4248 counter.
4249 @end itemize
4250
4251 @noindent
4252 For example:
4253
4254 @smallexample
4255 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4256 @end smallexample
4257
4258 @noindent
4259 and
4260
4261 @smallexample
4262 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4263 @end smallexample
4264
4265 @noindent
4266 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4267 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4268 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4269 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4270 input sections.
4271
4272 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4273 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4274 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4275 do something like this:
4276 @smallexample
4277 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4278 @end smallexample
4279 @noindent
4280 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4281 aligned upward to the specified value.
4282
4283 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4284 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4285 sections are ignored).
4286
4287 @node Input Section
4288 @subsection Input Section Description
4289 @cindex input sections
4290 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4291 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4292
4293 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4294 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4295 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4296 map the input files into your memory layout.
4297
4298 @menu
4299 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4300 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4301 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4302 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4303 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4304 @end menu
4305
4306 @node Input Section Basics
4307 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4308 @cindex input section basics
4309 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4310 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4311
4312 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4313 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4314
4315 The most common input section description is to include all input
4316 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4317 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4318 @smallexample
4319 *(.text)
4320 @end smallexample
4321 @noindent
4322 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4323 @cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
4324 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4325 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4326 example:
4327 @smallexample
4328 EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4329 @end smallexample
4330 @noindent
4331 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4332 and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4333 placed inside the section list, for example:
4334 @smallexample
4335 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4336 @end smallexample
4337 @noindent
4338 The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4339 two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4340 more than one section, as described below.
4341
4342 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4343 @smallexample
4344 *(.text .rdata)
4345 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4346 @end smallexample
4347 @noindent
4348 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4349 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4350 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4351 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4352 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4353 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4354
4355 When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4356 is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4357 immediately following section, for example:
4358 @smallexample
4359 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4360 @end smallexample
4361 @noindent
4362 will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4363 @file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4364 from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4365 exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
4366 could be modified to:
4367 @smallexample
4368 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4369 @end smallexample
4370 @noindent
4371 Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4372 before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4373 all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4374 @smallexample
4375 EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4376 @end smallexample
4377
4378 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4379 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4380 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4381 @smallexample
4382 data.o(.data)
4383 @end smallexample
4384
4385 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4386 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4387
4388 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4389
4390 @smallexample
4391 @group
4392 SECTIONS @{
4393 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4394 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4395 @}
4396 @end group
4397 @end smallexample
4398
4399 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4400 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4401 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4402 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4403 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4404
4405 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4406 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4407 with no whitespace around the colon.
4408
4409 @table @samp
4410 @item archive:file
4411 matches file within archive
4412 @item archive:
4413 matches the whole archive
4414 @item :file
4415 matches file but not one in an archive
4416 @end table
4417
4418 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4419 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4420 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4421 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4422 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4423 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4424 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4425 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4426 command.
4427
4428 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4429 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4430 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4431 @smallexample
4432 data.o
4433 @end smallexample
4434
4435 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4436 and does not contain any wild card
4437 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4438 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4439 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4440 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4441 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4442 the archive search path.
4443
4444 @node Input Section Wildcards
4445 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4446 @cindex input section wildcards
4447 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4448 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4449 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4450 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4451 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4452
4453 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4454 pattern for the file name.
4455
4456 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4457
4458 @table @samp
4459 @item *
4460 matches any number of characters
4461 @item ?
4462 matches any single character
4463 @item [@var{chars}]
4464 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4465 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4466 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4467 @item \
4468 quotes the following character
4469 @end table
4470
4471 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4472 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4473 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4474 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4475 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4476 a @samp{/} character.
4477
4478 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4479 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4480 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4481
4482 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4483 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4484 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4485 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4486 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4487 @smallexample
4488 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4489 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4490 @end smallexample
4491
4492 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4493 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4494 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4495 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4496 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4497 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4498 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4499
4500 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4501 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4502 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4503 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4504 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4505 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4506
4507 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4508 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4509 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4510 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4511 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4512
4513 @cindex SORT
4514 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4515
4516 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4517 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4518
4519 @enumerate
4520 @item
4521 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4522 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4523 sections have the same name.
4524 @item
4525 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4526 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4527 sections have the same alignment.
4528 @item
4529 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4530 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4531 @item
4532 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4533 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4534 @item
4535 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4536 @end enumerate
4537
4538 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4539 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4540 takes precedence over the command line option.
4541
4542 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4543 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4544 treated as nested sorting command.
4545
4546 @enumerate
4547 @item
4548 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4549 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4550 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4551 @item
4552 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4553 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4554 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4555 @end enumerate
4556
4557 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4558 command line option will be ignored.
4559
4560 @cindex SORT_NONE
4561 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4562 section sorting option.
4563
4564 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4565 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4566 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4567
4568 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4569 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4570 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4571 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4572 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4573 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4574 @smallexample
4575 @group
4576 SECTIONS @{
4577 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4578 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4579 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4580 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4581 @}
4582 @end group
4583 @end smallexample
4584
4585 @node Input Section Common
4586 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4587 @cindex common symbol placement
4588 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4589 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4590 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4591 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4592 named @samp{COMMON}.
4593
4594 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4595 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4596 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4597 input files are placed in another section.
4598
4599 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4600 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4601 @smallexample
4602 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4603 @end smallexample
4604
4605 @cindex scommon section
4606 @cindex small common symbols
4607 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4608 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4609 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4610 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4611 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4612 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4613 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4614 locations.
4615
4616 @cindex [COMMON]
4617 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4618 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4619 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4620
4621 @node Input Section Keep
4622 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4623 @cindex KEEP
4624 @cindex garbage collection
4625 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4626 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4627 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4628 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4629 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4630
4631 @node Input Section Example
4632 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4633 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4634 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4635 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4636 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4637 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4638 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4639 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4640 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4641 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4642
4643 @smallexample
4644 @group
4645 SECTIONS @{
4646 outputa 0x10000 :
4647 @{
4648 all.o
4649 foo.o (.input1)
4650 @}
4651 @end group
4652 @group
4653 outputb :
4654 @{
4655 foo.o (.input2)
4656 foo1.o (.input1)
4657 @}
4658 @end group
4659 @group
4660 outputc :
4661 @{
4662 *(.input1)
4663 *(.input2)
4664 @}
4665 @}
4666 @end group
4667 @end smallexample
4668
4669 If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4670 and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4671 automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4672 __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4673 indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4674 respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4675 C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4676
4677 @node Output Section Data
4678 @subsection Output Section Data
4679 @cindex data
4680 @cindex section data
4681 @cindex output section data
4682 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4683 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4684 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4685 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4686 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4687 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4688 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4689 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4690 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4691 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4692 counter.
4693
4694 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4695 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4696 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4697 stored.
4698
4699 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4700 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4701 @smallexample
4702 BYTE(1)
4703 LONG(addr)
4704 @end smallexample
4705
4706 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4707 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4708 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4709 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4710 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4711
4712 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4713 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4714 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4715 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4716 endianness of the first input object file.
4717
4718 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4719 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4720 @smallexample
4721 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4722 @end smallexample
4723 whereas this will work:
4724 @smallexample
4725 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4726 @end smallexample
4727
4728 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4729 @cindex holes, filling
4730 @cindex unspecified memory
4731 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4732 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4733 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4734 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4735 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4736 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4737 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4738 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4739 different parts of an output section.
4740
4741 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4742 value @samp{0x90}:
4743 @smallexample
4744 FILL(0x90909090)
4745 @end smallexample
4746
4747 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4748 section attribute, but it only affects the
4749 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4750 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4751 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4752 expression.
4753
4754 @node Output Section Keywords
4755 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4756 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4757 commands.
4758
4759 @table @code
4760 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4761 @cindex input filename symbols
4762 @cindex filename symbols
4763 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4764 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4765 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4766 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4767 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4768
4769 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4770 normally used for any other object file format.
4771
4772 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4773 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4774 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4775 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4776 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4777 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4778 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4779 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4780 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4781 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4782 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4783 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4784 ignored for other object file formats.
4785
4786 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4787 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4788 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4789 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4790 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4791 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4792 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4793 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4794 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4795 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4796 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4797 @code{exit}.
4798
4799 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4800 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4801 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4802 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4803 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4804 runtime code expects to see.
4805
4806 @smallexample
4807 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4808 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4809 *(.ctors)
4810 LONG(0)
4811 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4812 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4813 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4814 *(.dtors)
4815 LONG(0)
4816 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4817 @end smallexample
4818
4819 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4820 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4821 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4822 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4823 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4824 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4825 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4826 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4827
4828 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4829 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4830 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4831 scripts.
4832
4833 @end table
4834
4835 @node Output Section Discarding
4836 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4837 @cindex discarding sections
4838 @cindex sections, discarding
4839 @cindex removing sections
4840 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4841 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4842 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4843 @smallexample
4844 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4845 @end smallexample
4846 @noindent
4847 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4848 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4849 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4850 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4851 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4852 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4853 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4854 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4855 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4856
4857 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4858 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4859 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4860 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4861 section is discarded.
4862
4863 @cindex /DISCARD/
4864 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4865 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4866 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4867
4868 @node Output Section Attributes
4869 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4870 @cindex output section attributes
4871 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4872 like this:
4873
4874 @smallexample
4875 @group
4876 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4877 [AT(@var{lma})]
4878 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4879 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4880 [@var{constraint}]
4881 @{
4882 @var{output-section-command}
4883 @var{output-section-command}
4884 @dots{}
4885 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4886 @end group
4887 @end smallexample
4888
4889 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4890 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4891 remaining section attributes.
4892
4893 @menu
4894 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4895 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4896 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4897 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4898 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4899 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4900 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4901 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4902 @end menu
4903
4904 @node Output Section Type
4905 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4906 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4907 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4908
4909 @table @code
4910 @item NOLOAD
4911 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4912 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4913 @item DSECT
4914 @itemx COPY
4915 @itemx INFO
4916 @itemx OVERLAY
4917 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4918 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4919 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4920 section when the program is run.
4921 @end table
4922
4923 @kindex NOLOAD
4924 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4925 @cindex loading, preventing
4926 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4927 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4928 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4929 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4930 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4931 @smallexample
4932 @group
4933 SECTIONS @{
4934 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4935 @dots{}
4936 @}
4937 @end group
4938 @end smallexample
4939
4940 @node Output Section LMA
4941 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4942 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4943 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4944 @cindex load address
4945 @cindex section load address
4946 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4947 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4948 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4949 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4950 address is optional.
4951
4952 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4953 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4954 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4955 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4956 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4957
4958 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4959 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4960 load address:
4961
4962 @itemize @bullet
4963 @item
4964 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4965 the LMA address as well.
4966
4967 @item
4968 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4969
4970 @item
4971 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4972 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4973 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4974 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4975 the last section in the located region.
4976
4977 @item
4978 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4979 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4980
4981 @item
4982 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4983 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4984 @end itemize
4985
4986 @cindex ROM initialized data
4987 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4988 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4989 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4990 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4991 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4992 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4993 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4994 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4995 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4996
4997 @smallexample
4998 @group
4999 SECTIONS
5000 @{
5001 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
5002 .mdata 0x2000 :
5003 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5004 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5005 .bss 0x3000 :
5006 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5007 @}
5008 @end group
5009 @end smallexample
5010
5011 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5012 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5013 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5014 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5015 script.
5016
5017 @smallexample
5018 @group
5019 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5020 char *src = &_etext;
5021 char *dst = &_data;
5022
5023 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5024 while (dst < &_edata)
5025 *dst++ = *src++;
5026
5027 /* Zero bss. */
5028 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5029 *dst = 0;
5030 @end group
5031 @end smallexample
5032
5033 @node Forced Output Alignment
5034 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5035 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5036 @cindex forcing output section alignment
5037 @cindex output section alignment
5038 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
5039 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5040 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
5041
5042 @node Forced Input Alignment
5043 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5044 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5045 @cindex forcing input section alignment
5046 @cindex input section alignment
5047 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5048 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5049 sections, whether larger or smaller.
5050
5051 @node Output Section Constraint
5052 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5053 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5054 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5055 @cindex constraints on output sections
5056 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5057 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5058 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5059 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5060
5061 @node Output Section Region
5062 @subsubsection Output Section Region
5063 @kindex >@var{region}
5064 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
5065 @cindex memory regions and sections
5066 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5067 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5068
5069 Here is a simple example:
5070 @smallexample
5071 @group
5072 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5073 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5074 @end group
5075 @end smallexample
5076
5077 @node Output Section Phdr
5078 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
5079 @kindex :@var{phdr}
5080 @cindex section, assigning to program header
5081 @cindex program headers and sections
5082 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5083 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5084 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5085 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5086 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5087 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5088
5089 Here is a simple example:
5090 @smallexample
5091 @group
5092 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5093 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5094 @end group
5095 @end smallexample
5096
5097 @node Output Section Fill
5098 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
5099 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
5100 @cindex section fill pattern
5101 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
5102 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5103 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5104 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5105 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
5106 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5107 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
5108 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
5109 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5110 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
5111 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
5112 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5113 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
5114
5115 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
5116 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
5117
5118 Here is a simple example:
5119 @smallexample
5120 @group
5121 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
5122 @end group
5123 @end smallexample
5124
5125 @node Overlay Description
5126 @subsection Overlay Description
5127 @kindex OVERLAY
5128 @cindex overlays
5129 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5130 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5131 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5132 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5133 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5134 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5135 than another.
5136
5137 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5138 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5139 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5140 command is as follows:
5141 @smallexample
5142 @group
5143 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5144 @{
5145 @var{secname1}
5146 @{
5147 @var{output-section-command}
5148 @var{output-section-command}
5149 @dots{}
5150 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5151 @var{secname2}
5152 @{
5153 @var{output-section-command}
5154 @var{output-section-command}
5155 @dots{}
5156 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5157 @dots{}
5158 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
5159 @end group
5160 @end smallexample
5161
5162 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5163 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5164 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
5165 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
5166 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5167 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5168
5169 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5170 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5171
5172 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5173 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5174 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5175 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5176 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5177 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5178
5179 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5180 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5181 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5182 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5183 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
5184
5185 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
5186 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
5187 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5188 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5189 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5190 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5191 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5192
5193 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5194 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5195
5196 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5197 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
5198 @smallexample
5199 @group
5200 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5201 @{
5202 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5203 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5204 @}
5205 @end group
5206 @end smallexample
5207 @noindent
5208 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5209 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5210 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5211 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5212 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5213 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
5214
5215 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5216 like the following.
5217
5218 @smallexample
5219 @group
5220 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5221 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5222 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5223 @end group
5224 @end smallexample
5225
5226 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5227 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5228 example could have been written identically as follows.
5229
5230 @smallexample
5231 @group
5232 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5233 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5234 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5235 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5236 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5237 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5238 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5239 @end group
5240 @end smallexample
5241
5242 @node MEMORY
5243 @section MEMORY Command
5244 @kindex MEMORY
5245 @cindex memory regions
5246 @cindex regions of memory
5247 @cindex allocating memory
5248 @cindex discontinuous memory
5249 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5250 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5251
5252 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5253 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5254 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5255 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5256 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5257 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5258 around to fit into the available regions.
5259
5260 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5261 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5262 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5263 @code{MEMORY} is:
5264 @smallexample
5265 @group
5266 MEMORY
5267 @{
5268 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5269 @dots{}
5270 @}
5271 @end group
5272 @end smallexample
5273
5274 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5275 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5276 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5277 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5278 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5279 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5280 command.
5281
5282 @cindex memory region attributes
5283 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5284 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5285 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5286 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5287 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5288 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5289 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5290
5291 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5292 @table @samp
5293 @item R
5294 Read-only section
5295 @item W
5296 Read/write section
5297 @item X
5298 Executable section
5299 @item A
5300 Allocatable section
5301 @item I
5302 Initialized section
5303 @item L
5304 Same as @samp{I}
5305 @item !
5306 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5307 @end table
5308
5309 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5310 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5311 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5312 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5313 attributes.
5314
5315 @kindex ORIGIN =
5316 @kindex o =
5317 @kindex org =
5318 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5319 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5320 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5321 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5322 @code{ORG}).
5323
5324 @kindex LENGTH =
5325 @kindex len =
5326 @kindex l =
5327 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5328 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5329 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5330 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5331
5332 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5333 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5334 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5335 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5336 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5337 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5338 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5339 region.
5340
5341 @smallexample
5342 @group
5343 MEMORY
5344 @{
5345 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5346 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5347 @}
5348 @end group
5349 @end smallexample
5350
5351 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5352 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5353 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5354 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5355 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5356 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5357 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5358 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5359 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5360
5361 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5362 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5363 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5364
5365 @smallexample
5366 @group
5367 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5368 @end group
5369 @end smallexample
5370
5371 @node PHDRS
5372 @section PHDRS Command
5373 @kindex PHDRS
5374 @cindex program headers
5375 @cindex ELF program headers
5376 @cindex program segments
5377 @cindex segments, ELF
5378 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5379 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5380 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5381 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5382
5383 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5384 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5385 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5386 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5387 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5388
5389 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5390 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5391 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5392 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5393 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5394
5395 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5396 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5397 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5398
5399 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5400 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5401
5402 @smallexample
5403 @group
5404 PHDRS
5405 @{
5406 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5407 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5408 @}
5409 @end group
5410 @end smallexample
5411
5412 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5413 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5414 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5415 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5416 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5417 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5418
5419 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5420 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5421 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5422 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5423 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5424 Section Phdr}.
5425
5426 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5427 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5428 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5429 contain the section.
5430
5431 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5432 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5433 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5434 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5435 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5436 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5437 segment at all.
5438
5439 @kindex FILEHDR
5440 @kindex PHDRS
5441 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5442 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5443 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5444 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5445 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5446 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5447 these keywords.
5448
5449 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5450 value of the keyword.
5451
5452 @table @asis
5453 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5454 Indicates an unused program header.
5455
5456 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5457 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5458 the file.
5459
5460 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5461 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5462
5463 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5464 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5465 found.
5466
5467 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5468 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5469
5470 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5471 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5472 ABI.
5473
5474 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5475 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5476
5477 @item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5478 Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5479
5480 @item @var{expression}
5481 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5482 be used for types not defined above.
5483 @end table
5484
5485 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5486 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5487 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5488 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5489 output section attribute.
5490
5491 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5492 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5493 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5494 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5495 header.
5496
5497 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5498 headers used on a native ELF system.
5499
5500 @example
5501 @group
5502 PHDRS
5503 @{
5504 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5505 interp PT_INTERP ;
5506 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5507 data PT_LOAD ;
5508 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5509 @}
5510
5511 SECTIONS
5512 @{
5513 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5514 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5515 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5516 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5517 @dots{}
5518 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5519 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5520 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5521 @dots{}
5522 @}
5523 @end group
5524 @end example
5525
5526 @node VERSION
5527 @section VERSION Command
5528 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5529 @cindex symbol versions
5530 @cindex version script
5531 @cindex versions of symbols
5532 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5533 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5534 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5535 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5536 shared library.
5537
5538 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5539 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5540 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5541
5542 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5543 @smallexample
5544 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5545 @end smallexample
5546
5547 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5548 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5549 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5550 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5551 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5552 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5553 library.
5554
5555 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5556 examples.
5557
5558 @smallexample
5559 VERS_1.1 @{
5560 global:
5561 foo1;
5562 local:
5563 old*;
5564 original*;
5565 new*;
5566 @};
5567
5568 VERS_1.2 @{
5569 foo2;
5570 @} VERS_1.1;
5571
5572 VERS_2.0 @{
5573 bar1; bar2;
5574 extern "C++" @{
5575 ns::*;
5576 "f(int, double)";
5577 @};
5578 @} VERS_1.2;
5579 @end smallexample
5580
5581 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5582 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5583 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5584 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5585 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5586 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5587 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5588 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5589 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5590 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5591
5592 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5593 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5594 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5595
5596 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5597 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5598 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5599
5600 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5601 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5602 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5603 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5604 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5605 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5606 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5607 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5608 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5609
5610 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5611 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5612 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5613 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5614
5615 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5616 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5617 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5618 won't.
5619
5620 @smallexample
5621 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5622 @end smallexample
5623
5624 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5625 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5626 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5627 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5628 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5629 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5630 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5631 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5632 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5633 search for each symbol reference.
5634
5635 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5636 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5637 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5638 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5639 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5640 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5641 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5642 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5643 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5644
5645 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5646 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5647 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5648 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5649 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5650 @smallexample
5651 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5652 @end smallexample
5653 @noindent
5654 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5655 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5656 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5657 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5658 takes precedence over a version script.
5659
5660 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5661 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5662 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5663 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5664 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5665
5666 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5667 source file. Here is an example:
5668
5669 @smallexample
5670 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5671 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5672 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5673 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5674 @end smallexample
5675
5676 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5677 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5678 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5679 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5680
5681 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5682 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5683 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5684 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5685 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5686 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5687
5688 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5689 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5690 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5691 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5692
5693 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5694
5695 @smallexample
5696 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5697 @end smallexample
5698
5699 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5700 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5701 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5702 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5703 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5704
5705 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5706 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5707 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5708 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5709 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5710 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5711 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5712 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5713 expect when you upgrade.
5714
5715 @node Expressions
5716 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5717 @cindex expressions
5718 @cindex arithmetic
5719 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5720 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5721 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5722 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5723
5724 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5725
5726 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5727 expressions.
5728
5729 @menu
5730 * Constants:: Constants
5731 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5732 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5733 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5734 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5735 * Operators:: Operators
5736 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5737 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5738 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5739 @end menu
5740
5741 @node Constants
5742 @subsection Constants
5743 @cindex integer notation
5744 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5745 All constants are integers.
5746
5747 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5748 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5749 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5750 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5751 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5752 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5753
5754 @cindex scaled integers
5755 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5756 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5757 @cindex suffixes for integers
5758 @cindex integer suffixes
5759 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5760 constant by
5761 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5762 @ifnottex
5763 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5764 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5765 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5766 @end ifnottex
5767 @tex
5768 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5769 @end tex
5770 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5771 respectively. For example, the following
5772 all refer to the same quantity:
5773
5774 @smallexample
5775 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5776 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5777 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5778 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5779 @end smallexample
5780
5781 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5782 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5783
5784 @node Symbolic Constants
5785 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5786 @cindex symbolic constants
5787 @kindex CONSTANT
5788 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5789 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5790
5791 @table @code
5792 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5793 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5794 The target's maximum page size.
5795
5796 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5797 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5798 The target's default page size.
5799 @end table
5800
5801 So for example:
5802
5803 @smallexample
5804 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5805 @end smallexample
5806
5807 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5808 supported by the target.
5809
5810 @node Symbols
5811 @subsection Symbol Names
5812 @cindex symbol names
5813 @cindex names
5814 @cindex quoted symbol names
5815 @kindex "
5816 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5817 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5818 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5819 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5820 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5821 @smallexample
5822 "SECTION" = 9;
5823 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5824 @end smallexample
5825
5826 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5827 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5828 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5829
5830 @node Orphan Sections
5831 @subsection Orphan Sections
5832 @cindex orphan
5833 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5834 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5835 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5836 output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5837 in which to place the orphaned input section.
5838
5839 If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5840 an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5841 placed at the end of that output section.
5842
5843 If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5844 sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5845 name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5846 orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5847 one new output section.
5848
5849 If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5850 then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
5851 in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5852 linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5853 attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5854 sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5855 support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
5856
5857 The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5858 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5859 output sections an orphan is placed in.
5860
5861 @node Location Counter
5862 @subsection The Location Counter
5863 @kindex .
5864 @cindex dot
5865 @cindex location counter
5866 @cindex current output location
5867 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5868 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5869 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5870 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5871 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5872
5873 @cindex holes
5874 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5875 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5876 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5877 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5878 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5879
5880 @smallexample
5881 SECTIONS
5882 @{
5883 output :
5884 @{
5885 file1(.text)
5886 . = . + 1000;
5887 file2(.text)
5888 . += 1000;
5889 file3(.text)
5890 @} = 0x12345678;
5891 @}
5892 @end smallexample
5893 @noindent
5894 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5895 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5896 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5897 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5898 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5899 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5900
5901 @cindex dot inside sections
5902 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5903 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5904 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5905 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5906 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5907 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5908
5909 @smallexample
5910 SECTIONS
5911 @{
5912 . = 0x100
5913 .text: @{
5914 *(.text)
5915 . = 0x200
5916 @}
5917 . = 0x500
5918 .data: @{
5919 *(.data)
5920 . += 0x600
5921 @}
5922 @}
5923 @end smallexample
5924
5925 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5926 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5927 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5928 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5929 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5930 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5931 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5932 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5933
5934 @cindex dot outside sections
5935 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5936 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5937 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5938
5939 @smallexample
5940 SECTIONS
5941 @{
5942 start_of_text = . ;
5943 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5944 end_of_text = . ;
5945
5946 start_of_data = . ;
5947 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5948 end_of_data = . ;
5949 @}
5950 @end smallexample
5951
5952 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5953 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5954 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5955 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5956 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5957 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5958 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5959 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5960 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5961 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5962 as follows:
5963
5964 @smallexample
5965 SECTIONS
5966 @{
5967 start_of_text = . ;
5968 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5969 end_of_text = . ;
5970
5971 start_of_data = . ;
5972 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5973 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5974 end_of_data = . ;
5975 @}
5976 @end smallexample
5977
5978 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5979 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5980 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5981 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5982 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5983 section. So you could write:
5984
5985 @smallexample
5986 SECTIONS
5987 @{
5988 start_of_text = . ;
5989 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5990 end_of_text = . ;
5991
5992 . = . ;
5993 start_of_data = . ;
5994 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5995 end_of_data = . ;
5996 @}
5997 @end smallexample
5998
5999 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6000 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6001
6002 @need 2000
6003 @node Operators
6004 @subsection Operators
6005 @cindex operators for arithmetic
6006 @cindex arithmetic operators
6007 @cindex precedence in expressions
6008 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6009 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6010 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6011 @ifnottex
6012 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6013 @smallexample
6014 precedence associativity Operators Notes
6015 (highest)
6016 1 left ! - ~ (1)
6017 2 left * / %
6018 3 left + -
6019 4 left >> <<
6020 5 left == != > < <= >=
6021 6 left &
6022 7 left |
6023 8 left &&
6024 9 left ||
6025 10 right ? :
6026 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6027 (lowest)
6028 @end smallexample
6029 Notes:
6030 (1) Prefix operators
6031 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
6032 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6033 @end ifnottex
6034 @tex
6035 \vskip \baselineskip
6036 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6037 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6038 \hrule
6039 \halign
6040 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6041 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6042 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6043 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6044 \noalign{\hrule}
6045 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6046 &highest&&&&&\cr
6047 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
6048 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
6049 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6050 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6051 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6052 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6053 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
6054 &7&&left&&|&\cr
6055 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6056 &9&&left&&||&\cr
6057 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
6058 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6059 &lowest&&&&&\cr
6060 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6061 \hrule}
6062 @end tex
6063 @iftex
6064 {
6065 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6066 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
6067 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6068 }
6069 @end iftex
6070 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6071
6072 @node Evaluation
6073 @subsection Evaluation
6074 @cindex lazy evaluation
6075 @cindex expression evaluation order
6076 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6077 an expression when absolutely necessary.
6078
6079 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6080 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6081 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6082 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6083
6084 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6085 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6086 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6087 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6088
6089 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6090 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6091 allocation.
6092
6093 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6094 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6095
6096 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6097 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6098 following
6099 @smallexample
6100 @group
6101 SECTIONS
6102 @{
6103 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
6104 @{ *(.text) @}
6105 @}
6106 @end group
6107 @end smallexample
6108 @noindent
6109 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6110 address}.
6111
6112 @node Expression Section
6113 @subsection The Section of an Expression
6114 @cindex expression sections
6115 @cindex absolute expressions
6116 @cindex relative expressions
6117 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6118 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6119 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
6120 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6121 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6122 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6123 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6124 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6125 operations.
6126
6127 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6128 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6129 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6130 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6131 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
6132 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6133 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
6134 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6135 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6136 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6137 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
6138 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6139 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6140 everywhere.
6141
6142 In the following simple example,
6143
6144 @smallexample
6145 @group
6146 SECTIONS
6147 @{
6148 . = 0x100;
6149 __executable_start = 0x100;
6150 .data :
6151 @{
6152 . = 0x10;
6153 __data_start = 0x10;
6154 *(.data)
6155 @}
6156 @dots{}
6157 @}
6158 @end group
6159 @end smallexample
6160
6161 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6162 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6163 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6164 section in the second two assignments.
6165
6166 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6167 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
6168
6169 @itemize @bullet
6170 @item
6171 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6172 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6173 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6174 @item
6175 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6176 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6177 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6178 @item
6179 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6180 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6181 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6182 before applying the operator.
6183 @end itemize
6184
6185 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6186
6187 @itemize @bullet
6188 @item
6189 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6190 @item
6191 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6192 @item
6193 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
6194 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
6195 (after above conversions) is also a number when
6196 @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6197 but an absolute address otherwise.
6198 @item
6199 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6200 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6201 section as the relative operand(s).
6202 @item
6203 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6204 conversions) is an absolute address.
6205 @end itemize
6206
6207 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6208 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6209 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6210 section @samp{.data}:
6211 @smallexample
6212 SECTIONS
6213 @{
6214 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6215 @}
6216 @end smallexample
6217 @noindent
6218 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6219 @samp{.data} section.
6220
6221 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6222 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6223
6224 @node Builtin Functions
6225 @subsection Builtin Functions
6226 @cindex functions in expressions
6227 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6228 use in linker script expressions.
6229
6230 @table @code
6231 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6232 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6233 @cindex expression, absolute
6234 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6235 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6236 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6237 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6238
6239 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6240 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6241 @cindex section address in expression
6242 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6243 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6244 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6245 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6246 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6247 the other two will be absolute:
6248 @smallexample
6249 @group
6250 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6251 .output1 :
6252 @{
6253 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6254 @dots{}
6255 @}
6256 .output :
6257 @{
6258 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6259 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6260 @}
6261 @dots{} @}
6262 @end group
6263 @end smallexample
6264
6265 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6266 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6267 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6268 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6269 @cindex round up location counter
6270 @cindex align location counter
6271 @cindex round up expression
6272 @cindex align expression
6273 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6274 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6275 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6276 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6277 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6278 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6279
6280 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6281 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6282 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6283 input sections:
6284 @smallexample
6285 @group
6286 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6287 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6288 *(.data)
6289 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6290 @}
6291 @dots{} @}
6292 @end group
6293 @end smallexample
6294 @noindent
6295 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6296 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6297 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6298 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6299
6300 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6301
6302 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6303 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6304 @cindex section alignment
6305 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6306 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6307 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6308 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6309 value in that section.
6310 @smallexample
6311 @group
6312 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6313 .output @{
6314 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6315 @dots{}
6316 @}
6317 @dots{} @}
6318 @end group
6319 @end smallexample
6320
6321 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6322 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6323 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6324 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6325 section.
6326
6327 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6328 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6329 This is equivalent to either
6330 @smallexample
6331 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6332 @end smallexample
6333 or
6334 @smallexample
6335 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6336 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6337 @end smallexample
6338 @noindent
6339 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6340 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6341 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6342 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6343 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6344 bytes in the on-disk file.
6345
6346 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6347 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6348 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6349 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6350 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6351
6352 @noindent
6353 Example:
6354 @smallexample
6355 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6356 @end smallexample
6357
6358 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6359 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6360 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6361 evaluation purposes.
6362
6363 @smallexample
6364 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6365 @end smallexample
6366
6367 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6368 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6369 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6370 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6371 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6372 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6373 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6374 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6375 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6376 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6377 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6378 section alignment.
6379
6380 @smallexample
6381 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6382 @end smallexample
6383
6384 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6385 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6386 @cindex symbol defaults
6387 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6388 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6389 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6390 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6391 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6392 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6393 existed, its value is preserved:
6394
6395 @smallexample
6396 @group
6397 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6398 .text : @{
6399 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6400 @dots{}
6401 @}
6402 @dots{}
6403 @}
6404 @end group
6405 @end smallexample
6406
6407 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6408 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6409 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6410
6411 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6412 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6413 @cindex section load address in expression
6414 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6415 Section LMA}).
6416
6417 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6418 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6419 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6420 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6421
6422 @kindex MAX
6423 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6424 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6425
6426 @kindex MIN
6427 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6428 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6429
6430 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6431 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6432 @cindex unallocated address, next
6433 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6434 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6435 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6436 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6437
6438 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6439 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6440 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6441
6442 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6443 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6444 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6445 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6446 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6447 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6448 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6449 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6450 name.
6451
6452 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6453 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6454 @cindex section size
6455 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6456 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6457 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6458 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6459 @smallexample
6460 @group
6461 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6462 .output @{
6463 .start = . ;
6464 @dots{}
6465 .end = . ;
6466 @}
6467 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6468 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6469 @dots{} @}
6470 @end group
6471 @end smallexample
6472
6473 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6474 @itemx sizeof_headers
6475 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6476 @cindex header size
6477 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6478 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6479 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6480 choose, to facilitate paging.
6481
6482 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6483 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6484 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6485 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6486 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6487 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6488 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6489 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6490 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6491 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6492 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6493 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6494 @end table
6495
6496 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6497 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6498 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6499 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6500 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6501 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6502 linker will report an error.
6503
6504 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6505
6506 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6507 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6508 commands.
6509
6510 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6511 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6512 read. This can affect archive searching.
6513
6514 @ifset GENERIC
6515 @node Machine Dependent
6516 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6517
6518 @cindex machine dependencies
6519 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6520 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6521 functionality are not listed.
6522
6523 @menu
6524 @ifset H8300
6525 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6526 @end ifset
6527 @ifset I960
6528 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6529 @end ifset
6530 @ifset M68HC11
6531 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6532 @end ifset
6533 @ifset ARM
6534 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6535 @end ifset
6536 @ifset HPPA
6537 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6538 @end ifset
6539 @ifset M68K
6540 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6541 @end ifset
6542 @ifset MIPS
6543 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6544 @end ifset
6545 @ifset MMIX
6546 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6547 @end ifset
6548 @ifset MSP430
6549 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6550 @end ifset
6551 @ifset NDS32
6552 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6553 @end ifset
6554 @ifset NIOSII
6555 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6556 @end ifset
6557 @ifset POWERPC
6558 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6559 @end ifset
6560 @ifset POWERPC64
6561 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6562 @end ifset
6563 @ifset SPU
6564 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6565 @end ifset
6566 @ifset TICOFF
6567 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6568 @end ifset
6569 @ifset WIN32
6570 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6571 @end ifset
6572 @ifset XTENSA
6573 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6574 @end ifset
6575 @end menu
6576 @end ifset
6577
6578 @ifset H8300
6579 @ifclear GENERIC
6580 @raisesections
6581 @end ifclear
6582
6583 @node H8/300
6584 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6585
6586 @cindex H8/300 support
6587 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6588 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6589
6590 @table @emph
6591 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6592 @item relaxing address modes
6593 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6594 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6595 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6596 respectively.
6597
6598 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6599 @item synthesizing instructions
6600 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6601 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6602 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6603 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6604 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6605 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6606 top page of memory).
6607
6608 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6609 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6610 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6611 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6612 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6613 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6614 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6615
6616 @item bit manipulation instructions
6617 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6618 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6619 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6620 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6621 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6622 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6623 the top page of memory).
6624
6625 @item system control instructions
6626 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6627 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6628 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6629 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6630 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6631 the top page of memory).
6632 @end table
6633
6634 @ifclear GENERIC
6635 @lowersections
6636 @end ifclear
6637 @end ifset
6638
6639 @ifclear GENERIC
6640 @ifset Renesas
6641 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6642 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6643 @node Renesas
6644 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6645
6646 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6647 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6648 options are required for these chips.
6649 @end ifset
6650 @end ifclear
6651
6652 @ifset I960
6653 @ifclear GENERIC
6654 @raisesections
6655 @end ifclear
6656
6657 @node i960
6658 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6659
6660 @cindex i960 support
6661
6662 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6663 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6664 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6665 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6666 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6667 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6668 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6669
6670 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6671 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6672 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6673 the names
6674
6675 @smallexample
6676 @group
6677 try
6678 libtry.a
6679 tryca
6680 libtryca.a
6681 @end group
6682 @end smallexample
6683
6684 @noindent
6685 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6686 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6687
6688 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6689 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6690 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6691 specifies a library.
6692
6693 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6694 @cindex relaxing on i960
6695 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6696 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6697 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6698 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6699 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6700 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6701 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6702 not itself call any subroutines).
6703
6704 @ifclear GENERIC
6705 @lowersections
6706 @end ifclear
6707 @end ifset
6708
6709 @ifset ARM
6710 @ifclear GENERIC
6711 @raisesections
6712 @end ifclear
6713
6714 @ifset M68HC11
6715 @ifclear GENERIC
6716 @raisesections
6717 @end ifclear
6718
6719 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6720 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6721
6722 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6723
6724 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6725
6726 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6727 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6728
6729 @table @emph
6730 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6731 @item relaxing address modes
6732 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6733 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6734 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6735 respectively.
6736
6737 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6738 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6739 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6740
6741 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6742 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6743 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6744 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6745 @code{bset} instructions.
6746
6747 @end table
6748
6749 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6750
6751 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6752 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6753 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6754 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6755 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6756 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6757 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6758 point to the function trampoline.
6759
6760 @ifclear GENERIC
6761 @lowersections
6762 @end ifclear
6763 @end ifset
6764
6765 @node ARM
6766 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6767
6768 @cindex ARM interworking support
6769 @kindex --support-old-code
6770 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6771 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6772 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6773 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6774 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6775 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6776 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6777 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6778 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6779 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6780
6781 @cindex thumb entry point
6782 @cindex entry point, thumb
6783 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6784 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6785 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6786 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6787 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6788 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6789
6790 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6791 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6792 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6793 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6794 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6795 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6796
6797 @cindex BE8
6798 @kindex --be8
6799 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6800 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6801 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6802 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6803 little-endian code.
6804
6805 @cindex TARGET1
6806 @kindex --target1-rel
6807 @kindex --target1-abs
6808 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6809 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6810 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6811 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6812
6813 @cindex TARGET2
6814 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6815 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6816 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6817 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6818 @table @samp
6819 @item rel
6820 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6821 @item abs
6822 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6823 @item got-rel
6824 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6825 @end table
6826
6827 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6828 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6829 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6830 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6831 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6832 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6833
6834 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6835 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6836 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6837
6838 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6839 relocations are ignored.
6840
6841 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6842 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6843 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6844 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6845
6846 @smallexample
6847 TST rM, #1
6848 MOVEQ PC, rM
6849 BX Rn
6850 @end smallexample
6851
6852 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6853 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6854 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6855
6856 @cindex USE_BLX
6857 @kindex --use-blx
6858 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6859 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6860 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6861 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6862 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6863
6864 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6865 specify it if you are using that target.
6866
6867 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6868 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6869 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6870 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6871 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6872 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6873 the support code can read the intended values.
6874
6875 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6876 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6877 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6878 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6879 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6880 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6881
6882 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6883 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6884 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6885 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6886 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6887 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6888
6889 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6890 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6891 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6892 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6893 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6894 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6895 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6896
6897 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6898 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6899 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6900 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6901 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6902 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6903 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6904
6905 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6906 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6907 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6908
6909 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6910 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6911
6912 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6913 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6914 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6915 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6916 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6917 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6918 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6919 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6920
6921 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6922 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6923
6924 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6925 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6926 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6927 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6928 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6929
6930 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6931 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6932 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6933 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6934 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6935 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6936
6937 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6938 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6939
6940 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6941 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6942 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6943 occurs.
6944
6945 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6946 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6947 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6948 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6949 occurs.
6950
6951 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6952 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6953 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6954 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6955 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6956 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6957 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6958 not be diagnosed.
6959
6960 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6961 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6962 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6963 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6964 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6965 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6966 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6967
6968 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6969 @kindex --pic-veneer
6970 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6971 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6972 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6973 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6974
6975 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6976 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6977 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6978 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6979 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6980 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6981 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6982 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6983 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
6984 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6985 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6986 where they should be placed.
6987
6988 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6989 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6990 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6991 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6992 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6993 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6994 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6995 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6996 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6997 from the input sections.
6998
6999 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7000 @samp{N = +1}.
7001
7002 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7003 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7004 otherwise.
7005
7006 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7007 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7008 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7009 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7010
7011 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7012
7013 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7014 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7015 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7016 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7017
7018 Please contact ARM for further details.
7019
7020 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7021 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7022 @cindex Merging exidx entries
7023 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7024
7025 @kindex --long-plt
7026 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7027 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7028 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7029 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7030
7031 @kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7032 @cindex AArch64 rela addend
7033 The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7034 link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7035
7036 @cindex Placement of SG veneers
7037 All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7038 Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
7039 @samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7040 veneers in memory.
7041
7042 @kindex --cmse-implib
7043 @cindex Secure gateway import library
7044 The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7045 specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7046 secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7047 executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7048
7049 @kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7050 @cindex Input import library
7051 The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7052 must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7053 given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7054 in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7055 @samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7056 library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7057 library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7058 for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7059 specified.
7060
7061 @ifclear GENERIC
7062 @lowersections
7063 @end ifclear
7064 @end ifset
7065
7066 @ifset HPPA
7067 @ifclear GENERIC
7068 @raisesections
7069 @end ifclear
7070
7071 @node HPPA ELF32
7072 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7073 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7074 @kindex --multi-subspace
7075 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7076 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7077 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7078 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7079 multiple sub-spaces.
7080
7081 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
7082 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7083 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7084 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7085 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7086 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7087 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7088 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7089 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7090 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7091 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7092 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7093 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7094 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7095 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7096 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7097
7098 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7099 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7100 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7101 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7102
7103 @ifclear GENERIC
7104 @lowersections
7105 @end ifclear
7106 @end ifset
7107
7108 @ifset M68K
7109 @ifclear GENERIC
7110 @raisesections
7111 @end ifclear
7112
7113 @node M68K
7114 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7115
7116 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7117 @kindex --got=@var{type}
7118 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7119 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7120 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7121 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7122 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7123 entries only at non-negative offsets.
7124 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7125 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7126 support such GOTs.
7127 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7128 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7129 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7130 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7131
7132 @ifclear GENERIC
7133 @lowersections
7134 @end ifclear
7135 @end ifset
7136
7137 @ifset MIPS
7138 @ifclear GENERIC
7139 @raisesections
7140 @end ifclear
7141
7142 @node MIPS
7143 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7144
7145 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7146 @kindex --insn32
7147 @kindex --no-insn32
7148 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7149 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7150 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7151 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7152 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7153 including 16-bit ones where possible.
7154
7155 @cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7156 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7157 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7158 The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7159 control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7160 @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7161 relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7162 calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7163 relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7164 instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7165 or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7166 the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7167
7168 @ifclear GENERIC
7169 @lowersections
7170 @end ifclear
7171 @end ifset
7172
7173 @ifset MMIX
7174 @ifclear GENERIC
7175 @raisesections
7176 @end ifclear
7177
7178 @node MMIX
7179 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
7180 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7181 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7182 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7183 can translate between the two formats.
7184
7185 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7186 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7187 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7188 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7189 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7190 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7191 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7192 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7193
7194 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7195 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7196 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7197 of a section.
7198
7199 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7200 are left out from an mmo file.
7201
7202 @ifclear GENERIC
7203 @lowersections
7204 @end ifclear
7205 @end ifset
7206
7207 @ifset MSP430
7208 @ifclear GENERIC
7209 @raisesections
7210 @end ifclear
7211
7212 @node MSP430
7213 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
7214 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7215 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7216 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7217
7218 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
7219 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7220
7221 @table @code
7222 @item @samp{.vectors}
7223 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7224
7225 @item @samp{.bootloader}
7226 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7227 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7228
7229 @item @samp{.infomem}
7230 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7231 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7232
7233 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
7234 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7235 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7236
7237 @item @samp{.noinit}
7238 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7239
7240 The last two sections are used by gcc.
7241 @end table
7242
7243 @ifclear GENERIC
7244 @lowersections
7245 @end ifclear
7246 @end ifset
7247
7248 @ifset NDS32
7249 @ifclear GENERIC
7250 @raisesections
7251 @end ifclear
7252
7253 @node NDS32
7254 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
7255 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
7256 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7257 relaxes objects according to these options.
7258
7259 @table @code
7260 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7261 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7262
7263 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7264 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7265
7266 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7267 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7268
7269 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7270 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7271
7272 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7273 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7274
7275 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7276 Update the existing EX9 table.
7277
7278 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7279 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7280
7281 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7282 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7283
7284 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7285 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7286
7287 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7288 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7289 @end table
7290
7291 @ifclear GENERIC
7292 @lowersections
7293 @end ifclear
7294 @end ifset
7295
7296 @ifset NIOSII
7297 @ifclear GENERIC
7298 @raisesections
7299 @end ifclear
7300
7301 @node Nios II
7302 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7303 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7304 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7305
7306 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7307 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7308 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7309 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7310 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7311 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7312 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7313 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7314 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7315 larger than 256MB.
7316
7317 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7318 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7319 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7320 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7321 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7322 register as a temporary.
7323
7324 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7325 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7326 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7327
7328 @ifclear GENERIC
7329 @lowersections
7330 @end ifclear
7331 @end ifset
7332
7333 @ifset POWERPC
7334 @ifclear GENERIC
7335 @raisesections
7336 @end ifclear
7337
7338 @node PowerPC ELF32
7339 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7340 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7341 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7342 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7343 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7344 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7345 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7346 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7347 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7348 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7349 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7350 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7351 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7352
7353 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7354 @table @option
7355 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7356 @kindex --bss-plt
7357 @item --bss-plt
7358 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7359 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7360 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7361 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7362 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7363 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7364 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7365 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7366
7367 @kindex --secure-plt
7368 @item --secure-plt
7369 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7370 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7371 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7372 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7373 style BSS PLT.
7374
7375 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7376 @kindex --sdata-got
7377 @item --sdata-got
7378 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7379 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7380 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7381 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7382 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7383 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7384 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7385 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7386 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7387 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7388 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7389 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7390
7391 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7392 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7393 @item --emit-stub-syms
7394 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7395 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7396
7397 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7398 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7399 @item --no-tls-optimize
7400 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7401 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7402 disable the optimization.
7403 @end table
7404
7405 @ifclear GENERIC
7406 @lowersections
7407 @end ifclear
7408 @end ifset
7409
7410 @ifset POWERPC64
7411 @ifclear GENERIC
7412 @raisesections
7413 @end ifclear
7414
7415 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7416 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7417
7418 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7419 @table @option
7420 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7421 @kindex --stub-group-size
7422 @item --stub-group-size
7423 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7424 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7425 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7426 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7427 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7428 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7429 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7430 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7431 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7432 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7433 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7434 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7435 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7436 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7437
7438 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7439 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7440 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7441 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7442
7443 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7444 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7445 @item --emit-stub-syms
7446 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7447 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7448
7449 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7450 @kindex --dotsyms
7451 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7452 @item --dotsyms
7453 @itemx --no-dotsyms
7454 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7455 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7456 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7457 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7458 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7459 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7460 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7461 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7462 feature.
7463
7464 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7465 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7466 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7467 @item --save-restore-funcs
7468 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7469 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7470 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7471 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7472 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7473 link.
7474
7475 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7476 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7477 @item --no-tls-optimize
7478 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7479 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7480 disable the optimization.
7481
7482 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7483 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7484 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7485 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7486 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7487 These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7488 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7489 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7490 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7491 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7492 option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7493 Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7494 slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7495 application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7496 normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7497
7498 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7499 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7500 @item --no-opd-optimize
7501 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7502 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7503 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7504 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7505
7506 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7507 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7508 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7509 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7510 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7511 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7512 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7513
7514 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7515 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7516 @item --no-toc-optimize
7517 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7518 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7519 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7520 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7521 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7522 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7523 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7524 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7525 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7526 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7527 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7528 optimization.
7529
7530 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7531 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7532 @item --no-multi-toc
7533 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7534 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7535 where TOC
7536 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7537 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7538 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7539 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7540 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7541 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7542 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7543 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7544
7545 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7546 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7547 @item --no-toc-sort
7548 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7549 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7550 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7551 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7552 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7553 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7554 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7555 off this feature.
7556
7557 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7558 @kindex --plt-align
7559 @kindex --no-plt-align
7560 @item --plt-align
7561 @itemx --no-plt-align
7562 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7563 padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7564 specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7565 that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7566 stubs are packed tightly.
7567
7568 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7569 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7570 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7571 @item --plt-static-chain
7572 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7573 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7574 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7575 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7576
7577 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7578 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7579 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7580 @item --plt-thread-safe
7581 @itemx --no-thread-safe
7582 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7583 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7584 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7585 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7586 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7587 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7588 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7589 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7590 default behaviour.
7591 @end table
7592
7593 @ifclear GENERIC
7594 @lowersections
7595 @end ifclear
7596 @end ifset
7597
7598 @ifset SPU
7599 @ifclear GENERIC
7600 @raisesections
7601 @end ifclear
7602
7603 @node SPU ELF
7604 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7605
7606 @cindex SPU ELF options
7607 @table @option
7608
7609 @cindex SPU plugins
7610 @kindex --plugin
7611 @item --plugin
7612 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7613
7614 @cindex SPU overlays
7615 @kindex --no-overlays
7616 @item --no-overlays
7617 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7618 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7619 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7620 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7621
7622 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7623 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7624 @item --emit-stub-syms
7625 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7626 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7627
7628 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7629 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7630 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7631 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7632 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7633 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7634
7635 @cindex SPU local store size
7636 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7637 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7638 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7639 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7640 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7641
7642 @cindex SPU
7643 @kindex --stack-analysis
7644 @item --stack-analysis
7645 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7646 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7647 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7648 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7649 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7650 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7651 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7652 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7653 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7654 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7655 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7656 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7657 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7658 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7659 and calls will be given.
7660
7661 @cindex SPU
7662 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7663 @item --emit-stack-syms
7664 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7665 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7666 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7667 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7668 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7669 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7670 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7671 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7672 @end table
7673
7674 @ifclear GENERIC
7675 @lowersections
7676 @end ifclear
7677 @end ifset
7678
7679 @ifset TICOFF
7680 @ifclear GENERIC
7681 @raisesections
7682 @end ifclear
7683
7684 @node TI COFF
7685 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7686 @cindex TI COFF versions
7687 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7688 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7689 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7690 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7691 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7692 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7693
7694 @ifclear GENERIC
7695 @lowersections
7696 @end ifclear
7697 @end ifset
7698
7699 @ifset WIN32
7700 @ifclear GENERIC
7701 @raisesections
7702 @end ifclear
7703
7704 @node WIN32
7705 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7706
7707 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7708 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
7709 command line options mentioned here.
7710
7711 @table @emph
7712 @cindex import libraries
7713 @item import libraries
7714 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7715 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7716 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7717 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7718 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7719 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7720
7721 @item exporting DLL symbols
7722 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7723 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7724
7725 @table @emph
7726 @item using auto-export functionality
7727 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7728 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7729 which is controlled by the following command line options:
7730
7731 @itemize
7732 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7733 @item --exclude-symbols
7734 @item --exclude-libs
7735 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7736 @item --version-script
7737 @end itemize
7738
7739 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7740 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7741 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7742 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7743 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7744 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7745 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7746 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7747
7748 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7749 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7750 if either of the following are true:
7751
7752 @itemize
7753 @item A DEF file is used.
7754 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7755 @end itemize
7756
7757 @item using a DEF file
7758 @cindex using a DEF file
7759 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7760 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7761 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7762 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7763 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7764
7765 @example
7766 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7767 @end example
7768
7769 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7770 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7771
7772 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7773
7774 @example
7775 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7776
7777 EXPORTS
7778 foo
7779 bar
7780 _bar = bar
7781 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7782 var1 DATA
7783 doo = foo == foo2
7784 eoo DATA == var1
7785 @end example
7786
7787 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7788 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7789 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7790 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7791 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7792 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7793 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7794 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7795 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7796
7797 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7798 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7799 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7800
7801 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7802 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7803 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7804 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7805
7806 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7807 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7808 non-default base address for the image.
7809
7810 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7811 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7812 filename specified on the command line.
7813
7814 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7815
7816 @example
7817 EXPORTS
7818 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7819 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7820 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7821 @end example
7822
7823 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7824 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7825 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7826 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7827 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7828 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7829 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7830
7831 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7832
7833 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7834 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7835 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7836 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7837 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7838
7839 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7840 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7841 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7842 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7843
7844 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7845 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7846 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7847 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7848 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7849 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7850 application will behave unexpectedly.
7851
7852 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7853 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7854 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7855 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7856 the DLL without an import library.
7857
7858 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7859 other DEF file statements
7860
7861 @cindex creating a DEF file
7862 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7863 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7864
7865 @item Using decorations
7866 @cindex Using decorations
7867 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7868 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7869 declared as:
7870
7871 @example
7872 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7873 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7874 @end example
7875
7876 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7877 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7878 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7879 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7880
7881 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7882 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7883 instead:
7884
7885 @example
7886 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7887 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7888 @end example
7889
7890 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7891 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7892 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7893 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7894 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7895 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7896 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7897 information.
7898 @end table
7899
7900 @cindex automatic data imports
7901 @item automatic data imports
7902 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7903 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7904 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7905 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7906 code to these platforms, especially for large
7907 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7908 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7909 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7910 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7911 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7912 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7913 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7914 trigger the feature's use.
7915
7916 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7917 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7918
7919 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7920 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7921
7922 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7923 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7924 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7925 below.
7926
7927 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7928 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7929 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7930 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7931 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7932 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7933 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7934 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7935 references.
7936
7937 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7938 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7939 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7940 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7941 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7942 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
7943 run without error on an older system.
7944
7945 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7946 enabled as needed.
7947
7948 @cindex direct linking to a dll
7949 @item direct linking to a dll
7950 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7951 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
7952 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
7953 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
7954 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7955 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7956 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
7957 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
7958 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7959 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7960
7961 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7962 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7963 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
7964 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7965 select the dll instead of an import library.
7966
7967
7968 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7969 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
7970
7971 @example
7972 libxxx.dll.a
7973 xxx.dll.a
7974 libxxx.a
7975 xxx.lib
7976 cygxxx.dll (*)
7977 libxxx.dll
7978 xxx.dll
7979 @end example
7980
7981 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7982
7983 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7984 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7985 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7986 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
7987 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7988
7989 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7990 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
7991 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7992 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7993 could coexist on the same machine.
7994
7995 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7996 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
7997 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
7998
7999 @example
8000 bin/
8001 cygxxx.dll
8002 lib/
8003 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
8004 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
8005 @end example
8006
8007 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8008 done two ways:
8009
8010 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8011 @example
8012 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
8013 @end example
8014
8015 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8016 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8017 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8018 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8019
8020 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8021 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8022 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8023 making the app/dll.
8024
8025 @example
8026 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
8027 @end example
8028
8029 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8030
8031 @example
8032 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
8033 @end example
8034
8035 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8036 perfectly legal
8037
8038 @example
8039 bin/
8040 cygxxx-5.dll
8041 lib/
8042 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
8043 @end example
8044
8045 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
8046 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8047 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8048
8049 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
8050 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
8051
8052 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8053 work with auto-imported data.
8054
8055 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8056 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8057 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8058 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8059 possible to do this without an import lib.
8060
8061 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8062 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8063 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8064 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8065
8066 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
8067 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8068 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8069 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
8070 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8071 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8072 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
8073
8074 @item symbol aliasing
8075 @table @emph
8076 @item adding additional names
8077 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
8078 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8079 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8080 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
8081 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
8082
8083 @example
8084 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8085
8086 EXPORTS
8087 foo
8088 _foo = foo
8089 @end example
8090
8091 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8092
8093 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8094 source code using the "weak" attribute:
8095
8096 @example
8097 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
8098 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
8099 @end example
8100
8101 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8102 symbols.
8103
8104 @item renaming symbols
8105 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
8106 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
8107 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8108 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
8109 created). In the following example:
8110
8111 @example
8112 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8113
8114 EXPORTS
8115 _foo = foo
8116 @end example
8117
8118 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8119 @samp{_foo}.
8120 @end table
8121
8122 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
8123 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
8124 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
8125 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8126 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8127 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8128 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8129 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8130 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8131 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
8132 which is probably not what you wanted.
8133
8134 @cindex weak externals
8135 @item weak externals
8136 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8137 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8138 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8139 are three variants of weak externals:
8140 @itemize
8141 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8142 called lazy externals.
8143 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8144 This form is not presently implemented.
8145 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8146 implemented.
8147 @end itemize
8148 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8149 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8150 uses a default value.
8151
8152 @cindex aligned common symbols
8153 @item aligned common symbols
8154 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8155 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8156 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8157 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8158 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8159 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8160 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8161 warnings about unknown linker directives.
8162
8163 @end table
8164
8165 @ifclear GENERIC
8166 @lowersections
8167 @end ifclear
8168 @end ifset
8169
8170 @ifset XTENSA
8171 @ifclear GENERIC
8172 @raisesections
8173 @end ifclear
8174
8175 @node Xtensa
8176 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8177
8178 @cindex Xtensa processors
8179 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8180 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8181 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8182 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8183 example, with the command:
8184
8185 @smallexample
8186 SECTIONS
8187 @{
8188 .text : @{
8189 *(.literal .text)
8190 @}
8191 @}
8192 @end smallexample
8193
8194 @noindent
8195 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8196 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8197 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8198 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8199 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8200 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8201 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
8202
8203 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
8204 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
8205 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8206 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8207 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8208 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8209 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8210 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8211 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8212 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8213 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8214 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8215
8216 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8217 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8218 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8219 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8220 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8221 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8222 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8223 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8224 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8225 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8226 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8227 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8228 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8229 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8230
8231 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8232 control the linker:
8233
8234 @cindex Xtensa options
8235 @table @option
8236 @item --size-opt
8237 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8238 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8239 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8240 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8241 preserve the correctness of the code.
8242 @end table
8243
8244 @ifclear GENERIC
8245 @lowersections
8246 @end ifclear
8247 @end ifset
8248
8249 @ifclear SingleFormat
8250 @node BFD
8251 @chapter BFD
8252
8253 @cindex back end
8254 @cindex object file management
8255 @cindex object formats available
8256 @kindex objdump -i
8257 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8258 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8259 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8260 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8261 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8262 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8263 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8264 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8265 list all the formats available for your configuration.
8266
8267 @cindex BFD requirements
8268 @cindex requirements for BFD
8269 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8270 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8271 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8272 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8273 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8274 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8275 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8276
8277 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8278 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8279 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8280 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8281
8282 @menu
8283 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8284 @end menu
8285
8286 @node BFD outline
8287 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8288 @cindex opening object files
8289 @include bfdsumm.texi
8290 @end ifclear
8291
8292 @node Reporting Bugs
8293 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8294 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8295 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8296
8297 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8298
8299 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8300 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8301 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8302 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8303 @command{ld}.
8304
8305 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8306 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8307
8308 @menu
8309 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8310 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8311 @end menu
8312
8313 @node Bug Criteria
8314 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8315 @cindex bug criteria
8316
8317 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8318
8319 @itemize @bullet
8320 @cindex fatal signal
8321 @cindex linker crash
8322 @cindex crash of linker
8323 @item
8324 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8325 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8326
8327 @cindex error on valid input
8328 @item
8329 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8330
8331 @cindex invalid input
8332 @item
8333 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8334 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8335 object files are correct.
8336
8337 @item
8338 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8339 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8340 @end itemize
8341
8342 @node Bug Reporting
8343 @section How to Report Bugs
8344 @cindex bug reports
8345 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8346
8347 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8348 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8349 recommend you contact that organization first.
8350
8351 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8352 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8353 distribution.
8354
8355 @ifset BUGURL
8356 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8357 @value{BUGURL}.
8358 @end ifset
8359
8360 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8361 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8362 fact or leave it out, state it!
8363
8364 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8365 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8366 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8367 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8368 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8369 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8370 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8371 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8372 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8373 and the most helpful.
8374
8375 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8376 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8377 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8378
8379 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8380 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8381 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8382 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8383
8384 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8385
8386 @itemize @bullet
8387 @item
8388 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8389 the @samp{--version} argument.
8390
8391 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8392 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8393
8394 @item
8395 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8396 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8397
8398 @item
8399 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8400 version number.
8401
8402 @item
8403 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8404 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8405
8406 @item
8407 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8408 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8409 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8410 sufficient.
8411
8412 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8413 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8414
8415 @item
8416 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8417 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8418 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8419 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8420 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8421 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8422 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8423 attachments are best.
8424
8425 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8426 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8427 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8428 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8429 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8430
8431 @item
8432 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8433 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8434
8435 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8436 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8437 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8438 a chance to make a mistake.
8439
8440 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8441 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8442 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8443 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8444 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8445 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8446 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8447 any conclusion from our observations.
8448
8449 @item
8450 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8451 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8452 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8453 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8454 context, not by line number.
8455
8456 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8457 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8458 @end itemize
8459
8460 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8461
8462 @itemize @bullet
8463 @item
8464 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8465
8466 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8467 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8468 changes will not affect it.
8469
8470 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8471 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8472 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8473 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8474
8475 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8476 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8477 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8478 less time, and so on.
8479
8480 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8481 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8482
8483 @item
8484 A patch for the bug.
8485
8486 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8487 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8488 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8489 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8490
8491 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8492 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8493 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8494 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8495 fixed.
8496
8497 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8498 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8499 help us to understand.
8500
8501 @item
8502 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8503
8504 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8505 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8506 @end itemize
8507
8508 @node MRI
8509 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8510 @cindex MRI compatibility
8511 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8512 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8513 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8514 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8515 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8516 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8517 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8518
8519 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8520 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8521 features to make use of them.
8522
8523 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8524 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8525
8526 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8527 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8528 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8529 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8530 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8531
8532 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8533
8534 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8535 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8536 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8537
8538 @table @code
8539 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8540 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8541 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8542 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8543 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8544 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8545 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8546 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8547 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8548 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8549 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8550
8551 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8552 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8553 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8554 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8555
8556 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8557
8558 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8559 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8560 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8561 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8562
8563 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8564 @item BASE @var{expression}
8565 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8566 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8567
8568 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8569 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8570 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8571 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8572
8573 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8574 @item END
8575 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8576
8577 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8578 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8579 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8580 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
8581
8582 @enumerate
8583 @item
8584 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8585
8586 @item
8587 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8588
8589 @item
8590 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8591 @samp{COFF}
8592 @end enumerate
8593
8594 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8595 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8596 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8597 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8598
8599 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8600 same line, with no change in its effect.
8601
8602 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8603 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8604 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8605 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8606 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8607 command line.
8608
8609 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8610 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8611 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8612 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8613 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8614
8615 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8616 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8617 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8618 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8619 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8620 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8621 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8622 file, in the order specified.
8623
8624 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8625 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8626 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8627 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8628 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8629 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8630
8631 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8632 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8633 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8634 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8635 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8636 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8637 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8638 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8639 @end table
8640
8641 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8642 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8643 @include fdl.texi
8644
8645 @node LD Index
8646 @unnumbered LD Index
8647
8648 @printindex cp
8649
8650 @tex
8651 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8652 % meantime:
8653 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8654 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8655 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8656 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8657 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8658 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8659 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8660 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8661 \page\colophon
8662 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8663 @end tex
8664
8665 @bye